18.08.2013 Views

Operations Sentinel Status User Guide - Public Support Login - Unisys

Operations Sentinel Status User Guide - Public Support Login - Unisys

Operations Sentinel Status User Guide - Public Support Login - Unisys

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

ClearPath Enterprise<br />

Servers<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong><br />

<strong>Status</strong><br />

<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong> Level 9.0<br />

Printed in USA<br />

April 2005 7833 4778–008


ClearPath Enterprise<br />

Servers<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong><br />

<strong>Status</strong><br />

<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

© 2005 <strong>Unisys</strong> Corporation.<br />

All rights reserved.<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong> Level 9.0<br />

Printed in USA<br />

April 2005 7833 4778–008<br />

UNISYS


NO WARRANTIES OF ANY NATURE ARE EXTENDED BY THIS DOCUMENT. Any product or related information<br />

described herein is only furnished pursuant and subject to the terms and conditions of a duly executed agreement to<br />

purchase or lease equipment or to license software. The only warranties made by <strong>Unisys</strong>, if any, with respect to the<br />

products described in this document are set forth in such agreement. <strong>Unisys</strong> cannot accept any financial or other<br />

responsibility that may be the result of your use of the information in this document or software material, including<br />

direct, special, or consequential damages.<br />

You should be very careful to ensure that the use of this information and/or software material complies with the laws,<br />

rules, and regulations of the jurisdictions with respect to which it is used.<br />

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Revisions may be issued to advise of such<br />

changes and/or additions.<br />

Notice to U.S. Government End <strong>User</strong>s: This is commercial computer software or hardware documentation developed at<br />

private expense. Use, reproduction, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the terms of <strong>Unisys</strong> standard<br />

commercial license for the products, and where applicable, the restricted/limited rights provisions of the contract data<br />

rights clauses.<br />

Correspondence regarding this publication can be e-mailed to doc@unisys.com.<br />

<strong>Unisys</strong> and ClearPath are registered trademarks of <strong>Unisys</strong> Corporation in the United States and other countries.<br />

All other brands and products referenced in this document are acknowledged to be the trademarks or registered<br />

trademarks of their respective holders.


ClearPath Enterprise<br />

Servers<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong><br />

<strong>Status</strong><br />

<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong><br />

Level 9.0<br />

ClearPath<br />

Enterprise<br />

Servers<br />

<strong>Operations</strong><br />

<strong>Sentinel</strong><br />

<strong>Status</strong><br />

<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

<strong>Operations</strong><br />

<strong>Sentinel</strong><br />

Level 9.0<br />

7833 4778–008 7833 4778–008<br />

Bend here, peel upwards and apply to spine.


Contents<br />

Section 1. Introduction to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

1.1. Description of <strong>Status</strong> ............................................................... 1–4<br />

1.1.1. How <strong>Status</strong> Works .......................................................... 1–4<br />

1.1.2. Availability of <strong>Status</strong> ........................................................ 1–6<br />

1.1.3. Menu Structure ............................................................... 1–7<br />

1.2. Introduction to Components.................................................... 1–8<br />

1.2.1. Component Attributes..................................................... 1–8<br />

1.2.2. Component Classes ........................................................ 1–8<br />

1.2.3. Event Reports.................................................................. 1–9<br />

1.2.4. Shared Components ..................................................... 1–10<br />

1.2.5. How Components Are Identified .................................. 1–10<br />

1.2.6. Creating Components ................................................... 1–11<br />

1.2.7. Component Groups....................................................... 1–11<br />

1.2.8. Instruction and Note Files ............................................. 1–11<br />

1.2.9. Alarms ........................................................................... 1–12<br />

1.2.10. External Applications..................................................... 1–12<br />

Section 2. Getting Started<br />

2.1. Operating Considerations ........................................................ 2–2<br />

2.1.1. Event Report Considerations .......................................... 2–2<br />

2.1.2. Event Report Value Pairs................................................. 2–2<br />

2.1.3. Tape Monitor for OS 2200 and MCP Systems<br />

[OS 2200 MCP] .......................................................... 2–4<br />

2.1.4. OS 2200 Considerations [OS 2200] .............................. 2–5<br />

2.1.5. MCP Considerations [MCP] .......................................... 2–6<br />

2.1.6. UNIX Systems Considerations [UNIX] .......................... 2–7<br />

2.1.7. Windows Considerations [Windows]............................ 2–7<br />

2.1.8. Summary of <strong>Status</strong> Information Sources........................ 2–8<br />

2.2. Preparing to Use <strong>Status</strong> ........................................................... 2–9<br />

2.2.1. Preliminary Steps ............................................................ 2–9<br />

2.2.2. Configuring <strong>Status</strong>......................................................... 2–10<br />

2.3. Setting Up <strong>Status</strong>................................................................... 2–12<br />

2.3.1. Classifications................................................................ 2–12<br />

2.3.2. Icon Files ....................................................................... 2–13<br />

2.3.3. Resource Sets ............................................................... 2–15<br />

2.3.4. Configurations ............................................................... 2–15<br />

2.3.5. <strong>User</strong>s ............................................................................. 2–15<br />

2.3.6. Diagram Definitions....................................................... 2–15<br />

7833 4778–008 iii


Contents<br />

2.3.7. Component Sets ............................................................2–17<br />

2.4. Starting and Terminating <strong>Status</strong> .............................................2–19<br />

2.4.1. Starting <strong>Status</strong> from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Console......................................................................2–19<br />

2.4.2. Starting <strong>Status</strong> Independently of Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Console ...................................................2–20<br />

2.4.3. Automatic Environment Setup on Initialization ..............2–21<br />

2.4.4. Terminating <strong>Status</strong>.........................................................2–21<br />

2.5. Changing the <strong>Status</strong> Environment..........................................2–22<br />

2.5.1. Selecting a Different Classification ................................2–22<br />

2.5.2. Selecting a Different Configuration................................2–22<br />

2.5.3. Selecting a Different Resource Set ...............................2–23<br />

2.5.4. Selecting a Different Trace Level...................................2–24<br />

Section 3. <strong>Status</strong> Displays<br />

3.1. <strong>Status</strong> Windows .......................................................................3–2<br />

3.1.1. Window Features.............................................................3–2<br />

3.2. <strong>Status</strong> Diagram .........................................................................3–3<br />

3.2.1. Icon Descriptions .............................................................3–3<br />

3.2.2. How the <strong>Status</strong> Diagram Is Updated ...............................3–5<br />

3.2.3. Operator Action................................................................3–6<br />

3.2.4. Pull-Down Menus ............................................................3–7<br />

3.2.5. Window Backgrounds......................................................3–9<br />

3.3. Subgroup Windows ................................................................3–10<br />

3.3.1. Pull-Down Menus ..........................................................3–10<br />

3.4. Component Tables..................................................................3–11<br />

3.4.1. Component Group Tables ..............................................3–11<br />

3.4.2. Components with Unexpected Values Table.................3–14<br />

3.4.3. Components with Notes Table ......................................3–15<br />

3.4.4. Unreported Components Table .....................................3–16<br />

3.4.5. Identical Components Table ..........................................3–17<br />

3.5. Attribute List ...........................................................................3–19<br />

3.5.1. Displaying an Attribute List ............................................3–20<br />

3.5.2. Attribute List Menus ......................................................3–21<br />

3.5.3. Initiating Actions ............................................................3–21<br />

3.5.4. Deleting Components ....................................................3–22<br />

3.6. Dialog Windows......................................................................3–23<br />

3.6.1. Entering Information ......................................................3–23<br />

3.6.2. Dialog Window Buttons .................................................3–23<br />

Section 4. Component Attributes<br />

4.1. Types of Attributes ...................................................................4–2<br />

4.1.1. Reported and Specified Attributes...................................4–2<br />

4.1.2. Attribute Data Types ........................................................4–2<br />

4.1.3. <strong>Status</strong> Attributes ..............................................................4–3<br />

4.1.4. String Attributes...............................................................4–4<br />

4.1.5. Numeric Attributes...........................................................4–4<br />

4.1.6. List Attributes ..................................................................4–5<br />

4.2. Attributes That Apply to All Component Classes .....................4–6<br />

iv 7833 4778–008


Contents<br />

4.2.1. Name............................................................................... 4–6<br />

4.2.2. Host................................................................................. 4–6<br />

4.2.3. Class................................................................................ 4–6<br />

4.2.4. Exceptions....................................................................... 4–6<br />

4.2.5. Seen ................................................................................ 4–7<br />

4.2.6. Notes............................................................................... 4–7<br />

4.2.7. Message.......................................................................... 4–8<br />

4.2.8. Event Report Time .......................................................... 4–8<br />

4.2.9. Event Received ............................................................... 4–9<br />

4.2.10. <strong>User</strong> Defined ................................................................... 4–9<br />

4.2.11. Groups............................................................................. 4–9<br />

4.2.12. Component Scope........................................................... 4–9<br />

4.2.13. Identical Components ................................................... 4–10<br />

4.3. Site-Defined Attributes .......................................................... 4–11<br />

4.3.1. Site-Defined <strong>Status</strong> Attributes ...................................... 4–11<br />

4.3.2. Site-Defined Numeric Attributes ................................... 4–12<br />

4.3.3. Site-Defined String Attributes ....................................... 4–13<br />

4.4. Attributes Specific to the OS 2200 Host Component<br />

Class [OS 2200] ............................................................... 4–14<br />

4.4.1. Exec Level ..................................................................... 4–14<br />

4.4.2. Site-Id ............................................................................ 4–14<br />

4.4.3. Data Collection .............................................................. 4–14<br />

4.4.4. Connected Consoles ..................................................... 4–15<br />

4.4.5. System Type ................................................................. 4–15<br />

4.4.6. Application Initialization ................................................. 4–16<br />

4.5. Attributes Specific to the OS 2200 Console<br />

Component Class [OS 2200] ........................................... 4–17<br />

4.5.1. Monitor.......................................................................... 4–17<br />

4.5.2. Connected to Application .............................................. 4–17<br />

4.5.3. Connected to Host ........................................................ 4–17<br />

4.5.4. Connected Host ............................................................ 4–18<br />

4.6. Attributes Specific to the MCP Host Class [MCP]............... 4–19<br />

4.6.1. Monitor.......................................................................... 4–19<br />

4.6.2. Connected to Application .............................................. 4–19<br />

4.6.3. Data Collection .............................................................. 4–19<br />

4.6.4. Host Agent Active ......................................................... 4–20<br />

4.6.5. Application Initialization ................................................. 4–20<br />

4.7. Attributes Specific UNIX Host Class [UNIX] ........................ 4–22<br />

4.7.1. Monitor.......................................................................... 4–22<br />

4.7.2. Connected to Application .............................................. 4–22<br />

Section 5. Diagram Definitions<br />

5.1. Defining Component Groups ................................................... 5–2<br />

5.1.1. Define Groups Tables...................................................... 5–2<br />

5.1.2. Capabilities ...................................................................... 5–3<br />

5.1.3. Changing a Group Name ................................................. 5–3<br />

5.1.4. Changing a Group Label .................................................. 5–3<br />

5.1.5. Selecting Icons ................................................................ 5–4<br />

5.1.6. Positioning Icons ............................................................. 5–5<br />

5.1.7. Changing the Component Group Table Template........... 5–6<br />

7833 4778–008 v


Contents<br />

5.1.8. Specifying Components to Be Included in a<br />

Group ...........................................................................5–7<br />

5.1.9. Defining Subgroups .........................................................5–8<br />

5.1.10. Adding New Component Groups.....................................5–9<br />

5.1.11. Copying a Component Group ..........................................5–9<br />

5.1.12. Deleting Existing Component Groups .............................5–9<br />

5.1.13. Adding Default Groups for a Selected Host...................5–10<br />

5.1.14. Deleting Default Groups for a Selected Host ................5–11<br />

5.1.15. Moving Default Groups for a Selected Host..................5–11<br />

5.1.16. Adding Default Groups for Each Host and Class ...........5–11<br />

5.1.17. Adding Host-Independent Component Groups<br />

for All Component Classes ........................................5–12<br />

5.1.18. Changing the Background..............................................5–12<br />

5.1.19. Changing the Label Color...............................................5–13<br />

5.1.20. Changing the Title ..........................................................5–13<br />

5.2. Defining Component Table Templates...................................5–15<br />

5.2.1. Changing the Screen Size of a Table Template .............5–17<br />

5.2.2. Changing the Display Behavior of a Table<br />

Template....................................................................5–18<br />

5.2.3. Changing the Class Associated with a Table<br />

Template....................................................................5–18<br />

5.2.4. Changing the Attribute Columns in a Table<br />

Template....................................................................5–18<br />

5.2.5. Adding New Component Group Table Templates.........5–19<br />

5.2.6. Deleting Existing Component Group Table<br />

Templates ..................................................................5–20<br />

5.2.7. Selecting a Different Component Group Table<br />

Template as the Default ............................................5–20<br />

5.3. Saving a Diagram Definition ...................................................5–21<br />

5.3.1. Replacing the Current Diagram Definition .....................5–21<br />

5.3.2. Saving a New Diagram Definition ..................................5–21<br />

5.4. Deleting Diagram Definitions..................................................5–22<br />

5.5. Changing the Diagram Definition in Use ................................5–23<br />

Section 6. Component Sets<br />

6.1. Defining Components Explicitly................................................6–2<br />

6.1.1. Edit Components Table....................................................6–2<br />

6.1.2. Changes You Can Make to Component<br />

Definitions....................................................................6–3<br />

6.1.3. Indicating Whether a Component Was Explicitly<br />

Defined ........................................................................6–3<br />

6.1.4. Specifying the Scope of a Component ............................6–3<br />

6.1.5. Specifying the Instruction File..........................................6–4<br />

6.1.6. Specifying Expected or Alarm Values for <strong>Status</strong><br />

Attributes .....................................................................6–4<br />

6.1.7. Specifying Minimum and Maximum Threshold<br />

Values ..........................................................................6–5<br />

6.1.8. Defining New Components .............................................6–5<br />

6.1.9. Deleting Components ......................................................6–5<br />

vi 7833 4778–008


Contents<br />

6.1.10. Defining Components for a Different Host or<br />

Class............................................................................ 6–6<br />

6.2. Saving Component Set Definitions.......................................... 6–7<br />

6.2.1. Saving a New Component Set Definition ....................... 6–7<br />

6.2.2. Replacing a Component Set Definition ........................... 6–7<br />

6.3. Deleting Component Set Definitions ....................................... 6–9<br />

6.4. Retrieving a Component Set.................................................. 6–10<br />

Section 7. Defining Classifications<br />

7.1. <strong>Status</strong> Configuration Overview................................................ 7–2<br />

7.2. Defining <strong>Status</strong> Classifications................................................. 7–3<br />

7.2.1. Creating or Editing a Classification.................................. 7–3<br />

7.2.2. Selecting a Different Classification ................................. 7–5<br />

7.2.3. Saving Classifications...................................................... 7–5<br />

7.2.4. Deleting Classifications ................................................... 7–6<br />

7.3. Changing Component Class Characteristics............................ 7–7<br />

7.3.1. Renaming a Component Class........................................ 7–7<br />

7.3.2. Selecting the Internal Class............................................. 7–7<br />

7.3.3. Selecting System Types.................................................. 7–7<br />

7.3.4. Changing the Class Label................................................ 7–8<br />

7.3.5. Selecting the Icon Family ................................................ 7–8<br />

7.3.6. Selecting the Default Scope............................................ 7–9<br />

7.3.7. Selecting the Creation Scheme....................................... 7–9<br />

7.3.8. Selecting the Initialization<br />

Mnemonic [OS 2200 MCP]..................................... 7–10<br />

7.3.9. Changing the Initialization<br />

Mnemonic [UNIX Windows Other]........................ 7–11<br />

7.3.10. Specifying Reinitialization.............................................. 7–11<br />

7.3.11. Specifying the Instruction File....................................... 7–12<br />

7.3.12. Specifying Retention of Note Files................................ 7–13<br />

7.3.13. Specifying Alarm Text ................................................... 7–13<br />

7.4. Adding and Deleting Component Classes ............................. 7–15<br />

7.4.1. Adding a New Component Class .................................. 7–15<br />

7.4.2. Copying a Component Class ......................................... 7–15<br />

7.4.3. Merging Classifications ................................................. 7–16<br />

7.4.4. Deleting Component Classes........................................ 7–16<br />

7.5. Configuring Site-Defined Attributes....................................... 7–17<br />

7.5.1. Configuring <strong>Status</strong> Attributes........................................ 7–17<br />

7.5.2. Configuring Numeric Attributes .................................... 7–19<br />

7.5.3. Configuring String Attributes......................................... 7–21<br />

7.6. Additional Specifications ........................................................ 7–23<br />

7.6.1. Editing a Single Class .................................................... 7–23<br />

7.6.2. Controlling Duplicate Alarm Behavior............................ 7–23<br />

Appendix A. Troubleshooting<br />

A.1. Event Report Logging ..............................................................A–2<br />

A.1.1. Trace Levels ....................................................................A–2<br />

A.1.2. SP-STATUS Log...............................................................A–2<br />

A.1.3. Log Message Information ...............................................A–3<br />

7833 4778–008 vii


Contents<br />

A.1.4. Message Type Codes ..................................................... A–3<br />

A.1.5. Exception Conditions ...................................................... A–3<br />

A.2. Unreported Components Table ............................................... A–5<br />

A.3. Reporting Problems................................................................. A–6<br />

Appendix B. Tape Monitor for OS 2200 Hosts [OS 2200]<br />

B.1. Tape Monitor Features ............................................................ B–2<br />

B.1.1. Capabilities...................................................................... B–2<br />

B.1.2. Accessing the Tape Monitor Application ........................ B–2<br />

B.2. TapeMon Classification [OS 2200] ........................................ B–3<br />

B.2.1. Tape Class Characteristics.............................................. B–3<br />

B.2.2. Host Class Characteristics .............................................. B–5<br />

B.2.3. Diagrams and Component Sets...................................... B–6<br />

B.2.4. Component Group Table Templates............................... B–6<br />

Appendix C. Tape Monitor for MCP Hosts [MCP]<br />

C.1. Tape Monitor Features ............................................................ C–2<br />

C.1.1. Capabilities...................................................................... C–2<br />

C.1.2. Accessing the Tape Monitor Application ........................ C–2<br />

C.2. MCPTapeMon Classification ................................................... C–3<br />

C.2.1. MCP_Tape Class Characteristics .................................... C–3<br />

C.2.2. Host Class Characteristics .............................................. C–4<br />

C.2.3. Diagrams and Component Sets...................................... C–6<br />

C.2.4. Component Group Table Templates............................... C–6<br />

Appendix D. UNIX Resource Monitor [UNIX]<br />

D.1. Using the UNIX Resource Monitor [UNIX] ............................ D–2<br />

D.1.1. UNIX Resource Monitor Features................................... D–2<br />

D.1.2. Capabilities...................................................................... D–2<br />

D.1.3. Accessing the UNIX Resource Monitor .......................... D–2<br />

D.1.4. UnixMon Classification ................................................... D–3<br />

D.2. UnixMon Classification [UNIX]............................................... D–4<br />

D.2.1. UNIX Host Class ............................................................. D–4<br />

D.2.2. CPU Class ....................................................................... D–5<br />

D.2.3. FileSystem Class............................................................. D–5<br />

D.2.4. LongProcess Class.......................................................... D–6<br />

D.2.5. Process Class.................................................................. D–7<br />

D.2.6. <strong>User</strong> Class....................................................................... D–8<br />

Appendix E. Classifications for ClearPath IX and ClearPath Plus<br />

Servers for OS 2200 [OS 2200 UNIX]<br />

E.1. Using the OS2200Mon Classification...................................... E–2<br />

E.2. Accessing the OS2200Mon Classification .............................. E–3<br />

viii 7833 4778–008


Appendix F. Predefined Icons Supplied with Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

Contents<br />

F.1. Viewing Icons........................................................................... F–2<br />

F.1.1. Icons for Use with the UNIX Resource Monitor<br />

Classifications ............................................................. F–2<br />

F.1.2. Icons for Use with Products from SMA and<br />

TeamQuest ................................................................. F–3<br />

F.1.3. Additional Alphabetic Icons ............................................. F–3<br />

F.1.4. Additional System Type Icons......................................... F–4<br />

F.1.5. Additional Hardware Icons .............................................. F–4<br />

F.1.6. Additional Pictorial Icons ................................................. F–5<br />

Appendix G. Related Product Information<br />

Index ............................................................................................. 1<br />

7833 4778–008 ix


Contents<br />

x 7833 4778–008


Figures<br />

1–1. Example of a <strong>Status</strong> Display .............................................................................. 1–4<br />

1–2. Data Flow to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>..................................................... 1–5<br />

1–3. Menu Structure of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>............................................ 1–7<br />

2–1. Tape Monitor Table ............................................................................................ 2–4<br />

2–2. <strong>Status</strong> and Legacy OS 2200 Systems ............................................................... 2–6<br />

2–3. <strong>Status</strong> and MCP Systems .................................................................................. 2–7<br />

2–4. How <strong>Status</strong> Obtains Component Information ................................................... 2–8<br />

2–5. Defining a Classification................................................................................... 2–11<br />

2–6. Relationship of Diagram Definitions to Classifications and<br />

Configurations.............................................................................................. 2–17<br />

3–1. <strong>Status</strong> Window Features ................................................................................... 3–2<br />

3–2. Example of a <strong>Status</strong> Diagram............................................................................. 3–3<br />

3–3. Component Group Table.................................................................................. 3–11<br />

3–4. Components with Unexpected Values Table................................................... 3–14<br />

3–5. Components with Notes Table ........................................................................ 3–16<br />

3–6. Unreported Components Table........................................................................ 3–17<br />

3–7. Identical Components Table ............................................................................ 3–18<br />

3–8. Attribute List .................................................................................................... 3–20<br />

3–9. Dialog Window................................................................................................. 3–23<br />

5–1. Define <strong>Status</strong> Diagram Groups Table................................................................. 5–2<br />

5–2. Table to Define Component Table Templates ................................................. 5–16<br />

5–3. A Component Group for Each Combination of Host and<br />

Component Class ........................................................................................ 5–24<br />

5–4. A Component Group for Each Component Class ............................................ 5–24<br />

6–1. Edit Components Table...................................................................................... 6–2<br />

7–1. Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification Table...................................................................... 7–3<br />

7–2. Changing the Reinitialize Value ........................................................................ 7–12<br />

D–1. UnixMon <strong>Status</strong> Diagram...................................................................................D–3<br />

E–1. OS2200Mon <strong>Status</strong> Diagram ............................................................................. E–3<br />

7833 4778–008 xi


Figures<br />

xii 7833 4778–008


Section 1<br />

Introduction to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

<strong>Status</strong><br />

This guide describes Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> and explains how to use it to monitor<br />

the status of hardware and software components on multiple systems, including<br />

OS 2200, MCP, UNIX, Windows, and other systems.<br />

Use of the New Product Name in This Document<br />

Audience<br />

Conventions<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> is now called <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong>. Throughout this document,<br />

however, the former product name, Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>, has been retained to reflect<br />

the very limited name changes applied within the product at this time.<br />

The primary audience for this guide consists of operators who use Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> to monitor the status of hardware and software components. A<br />

second audience consists of site administrators who configure <strong>Status</strong> and require<br />

information about its capabilities and operations.<br />

Use the following guidelines when using your mouse or keyboard for input to <strong>Status</strong>:<br />

Convention Description<br />

Left mouse button Used to select an item, resize a window, or move a window.<br />

Press Hold down the mouse button.<br />

Release Release the mouse button after pressing it.<br />

Click Press and quickly release the mouse button without moving the<br />

mouse. Unless stated otherwise, the left mouse button is<br />

assumed.<br />

Drag Move the mouse on the pad while the left mouse button is<br />

pressed.<br />

Double-click Click the mouse button twice in rapid succession without moving<br />

the mouse.<br />

Press Enter Press the Enter key.<br />

Press Delete Press the Delete key.<br />

7833 4778–008 1–1


Description of <strong>Status</strong><br />

Convention Description<br />

Press Ctrl-key Hold down the Ctrl key while pressing the specified key. Then<br />

release both keys.<br />

Path Abbreviations<br />

Throughout the document, the following path abbreviations are used:<br />

• sp-installation-folder<br />

A path to the folder where Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> is installed.<br />

• sp-data-folder<br />

A path to the folder where Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> data is installed.<br />

Host-Specific Information<br />

This document contains information for monitoring and controlling several types of<br />

computer systems. The following labels, and combinations of these labels, identify<br />

information that applies only to specific types of managed systems.<br />

Information in this document not using these labels applies to all system types.<br />

[Legacy OS 2200]<br />

<strong>Unisys</strong> OS 2200 systems and the OS 2200 nodes of <strong>Unisys</strong> ClearPath IX systems<br />

[ClearPath Plus OS 2200]<br />

OS 2200 partitions in a ClearPath Plus server<br />

[OS 2200]<br />

Legacy OS 2200 systems and ClearPath Plus OS 2200 servers<br />

[MCP]<br />

<strong>Unisys</strong> MCP systems and the MCP nodes of ClearPath Plus for MCP, ClearPath NX,<br />

and ClearPath LX systems<br />

[UNIX]<br />

UNIX systems and the UNIX nodes of ClearPath Plus for OS 2200, ClearPath IX, and<br />

ES7000 systems<br />

[Windows]<br />

Microsoft Windows .NET, Windows XP, Windows 2000, and Windows NT systems,<br />

and the Windows nodes of ClearPath Plus, ClearPath, and ES7000 systems<br />

[Other]<br />

Non-UNIX systems compliant with the ANSI X3.64 protocol<br />

These computer system labels can appear in headings, lists, and page headers.<br />

In the following example, all the information in this second-level topic applies only to<br />

MCP and UNIX systems:<br />

20.3. Using Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console [MCP UNIX]<br />

1–2 7833 4778–008


Class<br />

Description of <strong>Status</strong><br />

The next example shows a typical block containing only text. The information in the first<br />

paragraph applies to all computer systems (including OS 2200) because the block<br />

heading is unlabeled. All information to the end of the block (in this example, the second<br />

and third paragraphs) applies only to OS 2200 systems, because the block subheading is<br />

labeled [OS 2200].<br />

This attribute identifies the component class to which the component belongs. When<br />

you click the Class attribute, no action occurs.<br />

[OS 2200]<br />

Typically, the class of a component never changes once the component has been<br />

created. However, when <strong>Status</strong> receives an event report identifying a component of the<br />

Device class more specifically as a disk drive or tape drive, it changes the class<br />

accordingly.<br />

This final example illustrates a typical procedure in numbered steps. The first two steps<br />

apply to all systems. The third step, where the label “Windows” is indented within the<br />

step, applies only to Windows .NET, Windows XP, Windows 2000, and Windows NT<br />

systems. The last two steps apply to all systems. In other words, perform all five steps<br />

in the indicated order if you have a Windows system. Omit step 3 if you have a system<br />

other than Windows.<br />

Use the following procedure to<br />

1. Define classifications for <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

2. Customize the bar chart sets.<br />

3. [Windows]<br />

Configure alarm policies.<br />

4. Administer the UNIX Resource Monitor agent.<br />

5. Administer the HP OpenView agent.<br />

Release Level<br />

In classification names, x.y.z is the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> release level.<br />

7833 4778–008 1–3


Description of <strong>Status</strong><br />

1.1. Description of <strong>Status</strong><br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> is an application of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> that enables<br />

you to monitor the status of software and hardware components across multiple hosts,<br />

including OS 2200, MCP, UNIX, Windows, and other systems. The following illustration<br />

is an example of a <strong>Status</strong> display. Each row describes one component being monitored<br />

by <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

1.1.1. How <strong>Status</strong> Works<br />

Figure 1–1. Example of a <strong>Status</strong> Display<br />

<strong>Status</strong> maintains an inventory of components and their attributes based on an internal<br />

data model of component descriptions and attribute data associated with the<br />

components. The data model is populated and updated from messages and event data<br />

that are produced by the various systems being monitored.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> receives and processes attribute change and delete object event reports<br />

generated by the Single Point Autoaction Message System (SP-AMS), SMART<br />

Autoaction Message System (SMART AMS), ClearPath Plus Autoaction Message<br />

System (CP-AMS), UNIX Resource Monitor (URM) agent, and client applications. These<br />

event reports cause component information maintained and displayed by <strong>Status</strong> to be<br />

updated. For further information, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

The following illustration shows the flow of data from various sources to Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>. Items inside the large box reside on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

server, while items outside the large box reside on other systems. Event server<br />

application program interface (API) clients and user applications can reside on the Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> server or on monitored Windows and UNIX systems.<br />

1–4 7833 4778–008


Figure 1–2. Data Flow to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

Description of <strong>Status</strong><br />

[OS 2200]<br />

For legacy OS 2200 hosts, the AMS component of SMART compares console messages<br />

with user-defined patterns in an AMS database and generates event reports based on<br />

these messages.<br />

CP-AMS supports the automation of OS 2200 consoles in a ClearPath Plus server.<br />

CP-AMS invokes the actions that are defined for a pattern when it receives a message<br />

from an OS 2200 console matching that pattern. Each OS 2200 console in a ClearPath<br />

Plus server uses its own CP-AMS database. A change of database performed for one OS<br />

2200 console does not affect the other OS 2200 consoles in a ClearPath Plus server.<br />

That is, activating or deactivating a CP-AMS database does not affect the automation of<br />

other OS 2200 consoles in a ClearPath Plus server.<br />

ClearPath Plus OS2200 consoles are hosted in at least one <strong>Operations</strong> Servers. If<br />

desired, the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server itself can act as an <strong>Operations</strong> Server.<br />

[MCP UNIX]<br />

For MCP and UNIX hosts, SP-AMS compares console messages with user-defined<br />

patterns in an SP-AMS database and generates event reports based on these messages.<br />

7833 4778–008 1–5


Description of <strong>Status</strong><br />

[UNIX]<br />

For UNIX systems, Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> provides the UNIX Resource Manager (URM)<br />

agent to collect resource data on managed UNIX systems and send that data as event<br />

reports to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. For a description of the components<br />

monitored by URM, see Appendix D. For information on configuring and installing the<br />

agent, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

You can write your own agents to supply component information to <strong>Status</strong> for managed<br />

UNIX systems. These agents can send event reports to the spo_pipe file on the Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> server or they can use the Event Server API, which provides a<br />

programmatic interface for sending event data.<br />

[Windows]<br />

You can write your own agents to supply component information to <strong>Status</strong> for managed<br />

Windows systems. These agents can either use the spo_event command to send event<br />

reports to <strong>Status</strong> or they can use the Event Server API, which provides a programmatic<br />

interface for sending event data.<br />

[Other]<br />

You can also monitor the status of arbitrary systems and components associated with<br />

these systems using <strong>Status</strong>. An arbitrary system can represent a monitored component<br />

not directly connected to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>. It can represent, for example, a<br />

system management component that reports events of interest to Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

You use Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration to define arbitrary systems. Event<br />

reports, alarms, and log messages can be posted against a named arbitrary system<br />

through the Event Server application program interface (API), the Single Point Interface<br />

Pipe (spo_pipe), or SP-AMS. For further information, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong> and the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Event Server<br />

Application Program Interface Programming <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

1.1.2. Availability of <strong>Status</strong><br />

To use the full capabilities of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>, your site administrator must<br />

purchase and install either the Department or Enterprise Edition of Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong>. With Basic Edition, you can still use Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> with the<br />

classifications supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>, but you cannot create or change<br />

component classes and attributes within these classifications, nor can you create other<br />

classifications.<br />

[MCP OS 2200]<br />

The Tape Monitor, which is a specific use of <strong>Status</strong>, is provided as part of all editions of<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> for OS 2200 systems and as part of Enterprise or Department<br />

Edition for MCP systems. For further information about the Tape Monitor for OS 2200<br />

systems, see Appendix B. For further information about the Tape Monitor for MCP<br />

systems, see Appendix C.<br />

1–6 7833 4778–008


Description of <strong>Status</strong><br />

[UNIX]<br />

The UNIX Resource Monitor (see Appendix D) application of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

<strong>Status</strong> is included as part of all editions of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

1.1.3. Menu Structure<br />

This illustration shows the main menu structure of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

File<br />

Menu<br />

Select<br />

Diagram<br />

(5.5)<br />

Retrieve<br />

Component<br />

Sets<br />

(6.4)<br />

Select<br />

Classification<br />

(2.5)<br />

Select<br />

Configuration<br />

(2.5)<br />

Select<br />

Resource<br />

Set<br />

(2.5)<br />

Select<br />

Trace Level<br />

(2.5)<br />

Print<br />

Exit<br />

(2.4)<br />

Tables<br />

Menu<br />

Components<br />

with<br />

Unexpected<br />

Values (3.4)<br />

Components<br />

with Notes<br />

(3.4)<br />

Unreported<br />

Components<br />

(3.4)<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

(Main <strong>Status</strong> Display)<br />

Diagrams<br />

Menu<br />

Define<br />

Component<br />

Groups (5.1)<br />

Define<br />

Component<br />

Table<br />

Templates<br />

(5.2)<br />

Save<br />

Diagram<br />

(5.3)<br />

Save<br />

Diagram<br />

As<br />

Delete<br />

Diagrams<br />

(5.4)<br />

Component<br />

Sets Menu<br />

Define<br />

Components<br />

(6.1)<br />

Remove<br />

Unreported<br />

Components<br />

(6.2)<br />

Save<br />

Component<br />

Set<br />

(6.2)<br />

Save<br />

Component<br />

Set As<br />

(6.2)<br />

(5.3) Delete<br />

Component<br />

Sets<br />

(6.3)<br />

Help<br />

Menu<br />

General<br />

7833 4778–008 1–7<br />

Print<br />

Documents<br />

Trademarks<br />

About <strong>Status</strong><br />

Figure 1–3. Menu Structure of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

For detailed information about a task, refer to the subsection indicated in the<br />

corresponding box.


Introduction to Components<br />

1.2. Introduction to Components<br />

A component is a single instance of an object within the <strong>Status</strong> data model. Each<br />

component represents a software or hardware object, such as a printer, tape drive,<br />

process, run, or file system. It represents a part of a computer system that you want to<br />

monitor. <strong>Status</strong> directs your attention to components that need attention. Various<br />

displays in <strong>Status</strong> show the status of components in summary and detailed form.<br />

Section 3 describes the <strong>Status</strong> displays.<br />

1.2.1. Component Attributes<br />

<strong>Status</strong> maintains information about components in the form of attributes. An attribute is<br />

a named property of a component that is of interest to an operator monitoring the<br />

component. An attribute can assume certain values that change over time. An attribute<br />

value describes an aspect of the current state of the component. For example, a status<br />

attribute for a disk drive might describe its current status as up or down. In this case,<br />

“up” and “down” are attribute values. Depending on the attribute, the value may be an<br />

integer or a character string. Some attributes can have more than one value, called a list<br />

of values, simultaneously.<br />

Each component has a set of attributes. The names of these attributes remain fixed, but<br />

their values vary over time. There are attributes with fixed names (Message, Exceptions,<br />

Notes) that are common to all components. Other attributes have site-defined names.<br />

Each component can have up to eight of each type of site-defined attributes: status,<br />

numeric, and string.<br />

For status attributes, you can define alarm and expected values. For numeric attributes,<br />

you can specify threshold values. These settings direct <strong>Status</strong> to alert you of<br />

components that need attention. For further information about attributes, see Section 4.<br />

1.2.2. Component Classes<br />

Because the nature of components varies, an attribute that applies to one component<br />

may not apply to another. Therefore, <strong>Status</strong> groups components into classes. All<br />

components within a class have the same attributes.<br />

A classification is a named set of component classes monitored by <strong>Status</strong>. <strong>Status</strong><br />

comes with several classifications already defined. (See 2.3.)<br />

The classification generalx.y.z. supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> includes the<br />

following classes:<br />

[OS 2200]<br />

• OS 2200 host<br />

• OS 2200 console<br />

• OS 2200 run<br />

• Instruction processor (IP)<br />

• Input/output processor (IOP)<br />

1–8 7833 4778–008


• Storage area (memory module)<br />

• Channel<br />

• Control unit<br />

• Device<br />

• Disk drive<br />

• Tape drive<br />

[MCP]<br />

• MCP host<br />

• Disk drive<br />

• Disk family<br />

• Tape drive<br />

• Printer<br />

• Application<br />

[UNIX]<br />

• ANSI X3.64-compliant (UNIX) host<br />

• Process<br />

• File system<br />

• Central Processing Unit (CPU)<br />

• Long process<br />

• <strong>User</strong><br />

Introduction to Components<br />

If your site has installed the Department or Enterprise Edition of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>,<br />

you can change these component classes and define additional component classes using<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration. For further information, see Section 7.<br />

1.2.3. Event Reports<br />

An event report is an unsolicited data packet containing information about a component<br />

or about an event involving a component. Attribute values for a component are reported<br />

to <strong>Status</strong> by means of event reports. <strong>Status</strong> uses these event reports to monitor the<br />

components in its data model.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> processes two types of event reports. Attribute change (AC) event reports create<br />

new components and update the attributes of existing components. Delete object (DE)<br />

event reports delete components from the <strong>Status</strong> data model.<br />

Some event reports are generated when SP-AMS, SMART AMS, or CP-AMS matches a<br />

console message with a user-defined pattern in a database. Other event reports are<br />

generated by sources such as the URM agent and client applications, which forward<br />

event reports using the Single Point Interface Pipe (SPIP), the spo_event command, or<br />

7833 4778–008 1–9


Introduction to Components<br />

the Event Server Application Program Interface (API). For further information, see the<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong> and the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Event Server Application Program Interface Programming <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

The following examples show attribute change and delete object event reports as they<br />

would be specified in a SP-AMS, SMART AMS, or CP-AMS database, or as they would<br />

be sent to spo_pipe in the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> installation directory:<br />

TYPE=AC|CLASS=FileSystem|INSTANCE=/usr|HOST=localhost|<br />

Percent Space Used=78|Inodes Free=2345<br />

TYPE=DE|CLASS=FileSystem|INSTANCE=/usr|HOST=localhost<br />

The following examples show the same attribute change and delete object event reports<br />

as they would be sent by an application using the Event Server API:<br />

SPD_ReportValue("FileSystem","/usr","localhost",NULL,<br />

NULL,0,2,"Percent Space Used",78,"Inodes Free",2345);<br />

SPD_DeleteObject("FileSystem","/usr","localhost",NULL,NULL,0);<br />

1.2.4. Shared Components<br />

For a component shared by multiple hosts, such as a shared disk, the attribute values<br />

reported for the component may differ for each host. For example, a shared disk may be<br />

up on one host and down on another. Therefore, <strong>Status</strong> maintains a distinct logical<br />

component for each host reporting on the component. <strong>Status</strong> also provides a way to<br />

display in one table the logical components representing a single physical component.<br />

1.2.5. How Components Are Identified<br />

Components in <strong>Status</strong> are uniquely identified by a combination of three attributes:<br />

• Component name<br />

• Component class<br />

• Host on which the component resides<br />

By using these three attributes, <strong>Status</strong> can distinguish between two components of the<br />

same class and with the same name that reside on different hosts. In addition, two<br />

components on the same host can have the same name as long as they are of different<br />

classes. For example, a run and a disk drive on the same host can have the same name.<br />

For each event report <strong>Status</strong> receives, it checks the attributes in the event report to<br />

determine whether the event applies to a host in the current configuration and a<br />

component class in the current classification. <strong>Status</strong> discards any event report that<br />

applies to a host not in the current configuration or to a class not in the current<br />

classification.<br />

Once a component is created in <strong>Status</strong>, its name, host, and class cannot change because<br />

these are used to identify the component.<br />

1–10 7833 4778–008


1.2.6. Creating Components<br />

Introduction to Components<br />

A component in the <strong>Status</strong> data model can be created automatically based on an event<br />

report, or operations staff can define it explicitly.<br />

A component may be automatically created when <strong>Status</strong> receives an event report that<br />

applies to a component that it is not already modeling. Depending on the component<br />

class, <strong>Status</strong> responds to such an event report either by ignoring it or by adding a new<br />

component to its data model.<br />

When you define each component class using Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration, you<br />

specify which action to take. For details, see 7.2. Automatic creation of components is<br />

typically used for hardware components. With automatic creation, you do not have to<br />

define explicitly all the hardware components to be monitored. On an OS 2200 or MCP<br />

system, for example, the data collector collects available data for hardware components<br />

and, based on this data, components within <strong>Status</strong> are automatically created.<br />

You may, however, want to define explicitly some of the components to be monitored.<br />

One reason for doing this is to specify values for attributes (for example, Expected<br />

<strong>Status</strong>) different from the default values supplied during automatic creation. It is easy to<br />

define components explicitly and to save these definitions in named sets that you can<br />

retrieve later. For details, see Section 6.<br />

1.2.7. Component Groups<br />

A component group is a collection of components that operations personnel have<br />

decided to monitor through a single icon in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram. (See 3.2.) Components<br />

in a component group can be selected based on the names of the components, the<br />

classes of the components, and the hosts on which the components reside. For<br />

information about defining component groups, see 5.1.<br />

1.2.8. Instruction and Note Files<br />

Each component in <strong>Status</strong> can have two associated text files: an instruction file and a<br />

note file. These files reside on mass storage, so they remain on the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> server indefinitely, across multiple executions of <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

Instruction files enable your site to develop explicit instructions for operators: You can<br />

develop a different instruction file for each component, or associate one file with many<br />

similar components. For example<br />

• A site may have one instruction file that applies to all disk drives.<br />

• For tape drives, a site may have one instruction file for reel tapes and another<br />

instruction file for cartridge tapes.<br />

• A site may have a separate instruction file for every background run or process<br />

monitored by <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

For information about creating instruction files and associating them with components,<br />

see 6.1.<br />

7833 4778–008 1–11


Introduction to Components<br />

Note files enable operators to enter text notes that apply to specific components. Each<br />

note file is associated with only one component. Each component has an attribute<br />

named Notes, which can assume the value “yes” or “no.” <strong>Status</strong> automatically<br />

determines whether each component has a note file and sets the Notes attribute<br />

accordingly.<br />

It is easy to display the notes associated with a component, edit them, and delete them.<br />

You can also determine quickly which components have notes. For details, see 4.2.<br />

1.2.9. Alarms<br />

An alarm is a condition that requires operator attention. Alarms are displayed in the<br />

Alarms windows of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. An alarm can also cause an external<br />

action, if the identifier of the alarm matches the name of an action list in the active alarm<br />

policy.<br />

You can configure <strong>Status</strong> to raise an alarm for certain conditions it detects. You do this by<br />

specifying alarm text, alarm ids, and alarm severities for the attributes of a component<br />

class, as described in 7.3 and 7.5. You must also specify the attribute values that cause<br />

an alarm condition. For a status attribute, you select the alarm values for the component,<br />

as described in 4.3, 6.1, and 7.5. For a numeric attribute, you can specify a minimum or<br />

maximum alarm threshold, as described in 4.3, 6.1, and 7.5.<br />

While <strong>Status</strong> is running, if an attribute of a component attains an alarm value, and alarm<br />

text, alarm id, and alarm severity has been specified for the component class and<br />

attribute, <strong>Status</strong> raises an alarm with the given text, id, and severity. If this attribute later<br />

attains an attention or expected value, <strong>Status</strong> clears this alarm.<br />

1.2.10. External Applications<br />

An external application is a procedure, defined at your site, which you can initiate from<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console or <strong>Status</strong>. Any external applications developed at your<br />

site exist to meet needs specific to your site. When you launch an external application,<br />

the application might execute silently or might display windows on your screen,<br />

depending on what it does and how it was implemented. External applications can only<br />

run on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> workstation.<br />

When you launch an external application from <strong>Status</strong>, it is always launched on behalf of a<br />

specific component. This means that values from the component are automatically<br />

made available to the application through environment variables. These values include<br />

the name, class, and host of the component, as well as all of its attribute values.<br />

You can launch external applications in <strong>Status</strong> from various displays. For information on<br />

defining external applications, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

1–12 7833 4778–008


Section 2<br />

Getting Started<br />

This section discusses the following topics:<br />

• Operating considerations<br />

• Preparing to use <strong>Status</strong><br />

• Setting up <strong>Status</strong><br />

• Starting and terminating <strong>Status</strong><br />

• Changing the <strong>Status</strong> environment<br />

7833 4778–008 2–1


Operating Considerations<br />

2.1. Operating Considerations<br />

The following subsection describes different operation considerations.<br />

2.1.1. Event Report Considerations<br />

Attribute values for a component are reported to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> by event<br />

reports, which can be sent to <strong>Status</strong> by various sources. These sources include SP-AMS<br />

(MCP and UNIX systems), SMART AMS (legacy OS 2200 systems), CP-AMS (ClearPath<br />

Plus OS 2200 partitions), URM agents, and client applications that use the Single Point<br />

Interface Pipe (spo_pipe), spo_event, or the Event Server API.<br />

Sometimes an event report is generated when a console message from a managed<br />

system matches a user-defined pattern in the active SP-AMS, SMART AMS, or CP-AMS<br />

database. The event report describes the event that caused the original message to be<br />

generated. The SP-AMS, SMART AMS, and CP-AMS databases contain user-defined<br />

message patterns and define the actions that are taken if there is a match. If the<br />

message does not match any pattern in the active database, no event report is<br />

generated. A different SMART AMS or CP-AMS database can be active for each<br />

OS 2200 system console; a single SP-AMS database provides automation for all MCP<br />

and UNIX systems managed by the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server.<br />

In other cases, an event report is generated by the URM agent running on a managed<br />

UNIX system, which sends the event report to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server<br />

through the Event Server API. Once an event report is sent to the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> server, it is picked up by the Event Server daemon running there and<br />

forwarded to <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

You can also use the command spo_event to send any event report from a Windows<br />

host to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>. You can call this command from<br />

• A Windows command prompt.<br />

• Within a Windows script.<br />

• Within a user program.<br />

The spo_event executable is installed along with the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Windows<br />

agent in the installation folder. The command spo_event can be called only from a<br />

Windows host on which the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Windows agent is installed. If it is<br />

called from another Windows host, a Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> license violation occurs.<br />

2.1.2. Event Report Value Pairs<br />

An event report consists of a series of attribute value pairs (for example, TYPE=AC)<br />

separated by separator characters ( | ). An attribute value pair consists of an attribute<br />

name and an attribute value. To be accepted by <strong>Status</strong>, an event report must contain at<br />

a minimum the following attribute value pairs:<br />

2–2 7833 4778–008


Operating Considerations<br />

• TYPE<br />

The type of event report—AC (attribute change) or DE (delete object)—is required for<br />

the event report to be processed by <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

• CLASS<br />

The component class associated with the event report. This must be a <strong>Status</strong><br />

component class defined in the classification currently selected by the user. This<br />

corresponds to the Class attribute in <strong>Status</strong> (see 4.2).<br />

• INSTANCE<br />

The name of the component associated with the event report. This corresponds to<br />

the Name attribute in <strong>Status</strong> (see 4.2). For event reports from SMART AMS and<br />

CP-AMS, the character strings $HOST$ and $CONSOLE$ have a special meaning<br />

when used as values of an instance name. <strong>Status</strong> substitutes the name of the host<br />

($HOST$) or console ($CONSOLE$) from which the message came.<br />

• HOST<br />

The host to which the component belongs. The Host attribute is required only when<br />

the event report is sent using spo_event or the Event Server API. For event reports<br />

from SP-AMS, SMART AMS, or CP-AMS, the host is automatically assumed to be<br />

the host from which the message came.<br />

An event report may contain additional attribute value pairs, which must conform to the<br />

constraints defined for these attributes in the component class definition. <strong>Status</strong> rejects<br />

an event report that does not satisfy these requirements. For further information about<br />

event reports, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

For further information about defining component classes, see Section 7.<br />

Event Report Example<br />

Consider the following OS 2200 system message to load a tape on system host1:<br />

LOAD CT2043 CTDR31 OBACKUP -3 SAVALL<br />

In this message<br />

• CT2043 is the reel number.<br />

• CTDR31 is the tape drive name.<br />

• OBACKUP is the file name.<br />

• -3 is the file cycle number.<br />

• SAVALL is the run-id.<br />

This message could produce an event report with the following attribute value pairs:<br />

• TYPE=AC<br />

• CLASS=Tape<br />

7833 4778–008 2–3


Operating Considerations<br />

• INSTANCE=CTDR31<br />

• LOAD=YES<br />

• REEL_ID=CT2043<br />

• RUNID=SAVALL<br />

• FILENAME=OBACKUP<br />

After receiving this event report, <strong>Status</strong>, using the classification TapeMon, displays a<br />

table indicating that tape drive CTDR31 on system host1 requires reel CT2043 to be<br />

loaded.<br />

2.1.3. Tape Monitor for OS 2200 and MCP Systems<br />

[OS 2200 MCP]<br />

The OS2200 Tape Monitor is a specific use of <strong>Status</strong> and is provided as part of all<br />

editions of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>. Similarly, the MCP Tape Monitor is a specific use of<br />

<strong>Status</strong>, but it is only included in Department and Enterprise Editions of Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong>. The OS 2200 and MCP Tape Monitors enable your site to monitor tape drive<br />

activity on OS 2200 and MCP hosts. For status information about other component<br />

classes, the Department or Enterprise Edition of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> is required.<br />

To use the OS 2200 Tape Monitor, select the classification TapeMonx.y.z when you start<br />

<strong>Status</strong>. To use the MCP Tape Monitor, select the classification MCPTapeMonx.y.z. In<br />

these classification names, x.y.z is the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> release level.<br />

When you start <strong>Status</strong> with the Tape Monitor, the Tape Monitor diagram appears. This<br />

diagram displays the status of any tape drives you previously configured.<br />

Click an icon in the Tape Monitor diagram to display more detailed information about<br />

specific tape drive components. When you click an icon, <strong>Status</strong> displays a table<br />

describing the status of tape drives in the component group represented by that icon.<br />

The following illustration is an example of a Tape Monitor table.<br />

Figure 2–1. Tape Monitor Table<br />

2–4 7833 4778–008


2.1.4. OS 2200 Considerations [OS 2200]<br />

Operating Considerations<br />

To use <strong>Status</strong> with OS 2200 systems, you need the following software installed and<br />

operational at your site:<br />

• OMKEY background run<br />

The OMKEY background run collects basic information about components and<br />

directs this information to the system console.<br />

The data collector is part of the OMKEY background run. It supplies initialization data<br />

for <strong>Status</strong>. This allows <strong>Status</strong> to display the status of each hardware component on<br />

the managed system. Without the data collector, <strong>Status</strong> can determine the<br />

presence of a component only when a message about that component is sent to the<br />

system console.<br />

For accurate reporting by <strong>Status</strong>, OMKEY must be running on each managed<br />

OS 2200 system. OMKEY level 5R1 or higher is required.<br />

• SMART Autoaction Message System (SMART AMS) [Legacy OS 2000]<br />

SMART AMS runs on each legacy OS 2200 system console and provides automatic<br />

recognition of messages and the execution of corresponding actions. SMART AMS<br />

uses an AMS database to transform the console messages produced by the OMKEY<br />

background run into event reports, which are sent to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

server.<br />

• The ClearPath for OS 2200 Autoaction Message System (CP-AMS) [ClearPath<br />

Plus OS 2200]<br />

CP-AMS supports the automation of OS 2200 consoles in a ClearPath Plus server. It<br />

uses a database of message patterns and actions for these patterns. CP-AMS<br />

invokes the actions that are defined for a pattern when it receives a message from<br />

an OS 2200 console matching that pattern. Each OS 2200 console in a ClearPath<br />

Plus server uses its own CP-AMS database. A change of database performed for one<br />

OS 2200 console does not affect the other OS 2200 consoles in a ClearPath Plus<br />

server. That is, activating or deactivating a CP-AMS database does not affect the<br />

automation of other OS 2200 consoles in a ClearPath Plus server.<br />

To use the full capabilities of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> to monitor OS 2200<br />

systems, your site must do the following:<br />

• Purchase and install the Department or Enterprise Edition of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

• Use the AMS/CP-AMS database status22.bld included with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

This database is used in conjunction with the OMKEY run to initialize all OS 2200<br />

components described in the OS 2200 master configuration tables. The status22.bld<br />

database is installed in sp-data-folder\os2200-ams on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

server.<br />

To transfer an AMS database to an OS 2200 Console, use the utility ADBM, which is<br />

described in the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Autoaction Message System Administration<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

7833 4778–008 2–5


Operating Considerations<br />

The following illustration shows how the OMKEY background run on a legacy OS 2200<br />

system collects information and sends it as console messages to the OS 2200 system<br />

console. On the system console, SMART uses an AMS database to match these<br />

messages automatically, transform them into event reports, and send them to <strong>Status</strong><br />

running on a Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> workstation.<br />

System<br />

Components<br />

Initial<br />

State<br />

Data<br />

OMKEY<br />

Background<br />

Run<br />

Console<br />

Messages<br />

AMS<br />

Database<br />

Message<br />

Set<br />

Figure 2–2. <strong>Status</strong> and Legacy OS 2200 Systems<br />

2.1.5. MCP Considerations [MCP]<br />

Event<br />

Reports<br />

To use <strong>Status</strong> with MCP systems, you need the following software installed and<br />

operational at your site:<br />

<strong>Status</strong><br />

1. Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Department or Enterprise Edition<br />

2. Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface for ClearPath MCP<br />

The MCP agent running on a managed MCP host sends the following information to<br />

the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server:<br />

• Tape load and alert messages<br />

• <strong>Status</strong> of hardware components (tape, disk, and printer)<br />

• Definition of application programs that are known to the MCP API library<br />

3. Single Point Autoaction Message System (SP-AMS) database<br />

The MCP SP-AMS database (named MCPMon) transforms the information sent by<br />

the MCP agent so that <strong>Status</strong> and other Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> processes can use<br />

it.<br />

When <strong>Status</strong> establishes a connection with an MCP system, it requests hardware<br />

component information and application program information by sending an initialization<br />

message to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface for ClearPath MCP (MCP agent)<br />

running on the MCP host. The MCP agent queries the host for the information and sends<br />

only the requested information back to <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

The MCP agent can return initialization information for the following hardware<br />

components: tape drives, disk drives, and printers. Also, it can return initialization<br />

information for application programs that are linked to the MCP API library.<br />

2–6 7833 4778–008


Operating Considerations<br />

The MCP agent sends an unsolicited message to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server for<br />

each applicable hardware and application component. These messages must be matched<br />

by patterns in the active SP-AMS database and converted to event reports that are sent<br />

to <strong>Status</strong>. The SP-AMS database supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> (named<br />

MCPMon) contains these patterns.<br />

All the SP-AMS databases supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> are installed in sp-datafolder\sp-ams<br />

on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server.<br />

For further information about the MCP agent and the ClearPath MCP API library, see the<br />

MCP Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface Software Installation and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

The following illustration shows how MCP agent on MCP systems sends collected<br />

information and messages to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. On the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> server, SP-AMS uses a database of patterns, matches these messages,<br />

transforms them into event reports, and sends them to <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

Figure 2–3. <strong>Status</strong> and MCP Systems<br />

2.1.6. UNIX Systems Considerations [UNIX]<br />

The UNIX Resource Monitor (URM) agent runs on managed UNIX systems on which your<br />

site has installed it, and sends selected attribute values to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

server. The URM agent uses shell scripts, which report data through event reports using<br />

a remote Single Point Interface Pipe (SPIP) program on the managed host. This program<br />

provides the gateway from the managed host to the Event Server running on the Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. For each packet of event reports the URM agent sends to the<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server, the remote SPIP program connects to the Event Server<br />

and passes the event reports across the network.<br />

You can change some reporting parameters of the URM agent using Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Configuration. For further information, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

2.1.7. Windows Considerations [Windows]<br />

To monitor components on Windows .NET, Windows XP, Windows 2000, and Windows<br />

NT systems, you must develop your own agents to send component information to<br />

7833 4778–008 2–7


Operating Considerations<br />

<strong>Status</strong>. These agents can use the program spo_event to send the event reports to the<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. This program is installed on each managed<br />

Windows system when you transfer the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Windows interface<br />

software to the system. For further information, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

2.1.8. Summary of <strong>Status</strong> Information Sources<br />

This illustration shows how <strong>Status</strong> obtains information about components.<br />

Figure 2–4. How <strong>Status</strong> Obtains Component Information<br />

2–8 7833 4778–008


2.2. Preparing to Use <strong>Status</strong><br />

Preparing to Use <strong>Status</strong><br />

Before you begin to use <strong>Status</strong>, you must take the preliminary steps described in this<br />

subsection.<br />

2.2.1. Preliminary Steps<br />

Before using <strong>Status</strong>, a site typically takes these preliminary steps:<br />

1. Use Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration to configure hosts and consoles and to<br />

define classes of components (see “Configuring <strong>Status</strong>” later in this subsection).<br />

For further information about configuration, see Section 7 and the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

2. Determine which data is to drive the <strong>Status</strong> data model. One or more of the<br />

following data sources can supply event reports to <strong>Status</strong>:<br />

• Console messages<br />

Identify OS 2200, MCP, or UNIX messages that contain information for each<br />

component class. For OS 2200 and MCP systems, also consider messages sent<br />

from the data collector on these systems.<br />

In a SMART AMS, CP-AMS, or SP-AMS database, create a pattern for each<br />

message that has attribute-value information of interest. In this pattern, include<br />

an attribute change event report (TYPE=AC) as an action. For OS 2200 hosts,<br />

activate the appropriate SMART AMS or CP-AMS database on each console. For<br />

UNIX and MCP systems, activate the appropriate SP-AMS database on the<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server.<br />

Note: When both UNIX and MCP systems are being monitored, the active<br />

SP-AMS database must contain patterns for messages from systems of both<br />

types.<br />

• UNIX Resource Monitor agents<br />

Install and configure this agent on each managed UNIX system using the Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration application.<br />

• <strong>User</strong>-defined applications<br />

First develop a data collection method. The application must format this data<br />

into event reports and pass these event reports to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

server by one of the following methods:<br />

Ä Using the Event Server application program interface (API) on monitored<br />

UNIX or Windows systems.<br />

The function SPD_ReportValue sends an attribute change event report, while<br />

SPD_DeleteObject sends a delete object event report.<br />

Ä Using the command spo_event on a monitored Windows system to send an<br />

event report string to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server.<br />

After taking these steps, your site is ready to start <strong>Status</strong>. For information about starting<br />

<strong>Status</strong>, see 2.4.<br />

7833 4778–008 2–9


Preparing to Use <strong>Status</strong><br />

2.2.2. Configuring <strong>Status</strong><br />

Before using <strong>Status</strong>, your site must use Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration to define<br />

the information to be monitored. The specific information depends on how your site<br />

wants to use <strong>Status</strong>. For detailed information about configuration, see Section 7 and the<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

In general, you must perform the following definition steps:<br />

1. Modify an existing configuration or create a new configuration.<br />

Both Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console and Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> can use the<br />

same configuration. If <strong>Status</strong> is started from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, it<br />

must use the same configuration as the instance of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console<br />

that started <strong>Status</strong>. If <strong>Status</strong> is started independently of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Console, it can use any available configuration. In this case, it does not matter which<br />

configuration Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console is using (or even whether or not Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console is running).<br />

When you modify an existing configuration or create a new configuration for use with<br />

<strong>Status</strong>, you specify the hosts and system consoles that you want to monitor. You<br />

also define users and user classes to identify authorized <strong>Status</strong> users.<br />

2. Modify an existing classification or define a new classification, as follows.<br />

• Create component classes in the classification.<br />

• Modify characteristics of selected component classes, such as the following:<br />

internal class, class label, icon family, default scope, system types, creation<br />

scheme, initialization mnemonic, instruction file, and alarm text.<br />

• Configure any site-defined status attributes for these component classes,<br />

specifying the following for each attribute: attribute name, possible values,<br />

expected values, alarm values, alarm-id, alarm severity, timeout period, and<br />

default value.<br />

• Configure any site-defined numeric attributes for these component classes,<br />

specifying the following for each attribute: attribute name, default alarm<br />

minimum, default attention minimum, default attention maximum, default alarm<br />

maximum, unreported values, alarm-id, and alarm severity.<br />

• Configure any site-defined string attributes for these component classes,<br />

specifying the attribute name and associated attribute for each site-defined string<br />

attribute.<br />

You can skip all or part of step 2 if you use a classification supplied with Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong>, such as TapeMonx.y.z, MCPTapeMonx.y.z, or UnixMonx.y.z. See Appendix<br />

B, Appendix C, Appendix D, and Appendix E for more information.<br />

2–10 7833 4778–008


The following illustration shows the steps to define a classification.<br />

Component<br />

Class<br />

Internal<br />

Class<br />

Class<br />

Label<br />

Classification<br />

Component<br />

Class<br />

Component Class Characteristics<br />

Site-Defined<br />

<strong>Status</strong><br />

Attributes<br />

Instruction<br />

File<br />

Site-Defined<br />

Numeric<br />

Attributes<br />

Figure 2–5. Defining a Classification<br />

Preparing to Use <strong>Status</strong><br />

Component<br />

Class<br />

Alarm<br />

Text<br />

Site-Defined<br />

String<br />

Attributes<br />

After your site administrator has configured <strong>Status</strong> using Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Configuration, you can use <strong>Status</strong> to perform additional definition tasks, such as defining<br />

component table templates, component groups, and component sets. For an overview<br />

of the tasks you can perform with <strong>Status</strong>, see the illustration on the <strong>Status</strong> menu<br />

structure in 1.1.<br />

See Section 7 for additional configuration information.<br />

7833 4778–008 2–11


Setting Up <strong>Status</strong><br />

2.3. Setting Up <strong>Status</strong><br />

Minimal setup is needed to get Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> up and running. The<br />

application comes with defaults for most setup information. However, the strength of<br />

this application is the many ways it can be customized. For example, you can customize<br />

<strong>Status</strong> to accommodate different host and console configurations or operators.<br />

You can alter most of the definitions used by <strong>Status</strong> if you want to customize it, including<br />

• Classifications<br />

• Icon families<br />

• Resource sets<br />

• Configurations<br />

• <strong>User</strong>s<br />

• Diagram definitions<br />

• Component sets<br />

2.3.1. Classifications<br />

A classification is a named set of component classes monitored by <strong>Status</strong> at one time.<br />

You can define multiple classifications. This enables you to use <strong>Status</strong> for different<br />

applications, with each application monitoring a different set of components.<br />

If your site installed the Department or Enterprise Edition of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>, you<br />

can use Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration to change these classifications, define<br />

new classifications, merge classifications, or delete existing classifications. For further<br />

information, see Section 7.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> comes with several classifications already defined:<br />

• generalx.y.z<br />

This classification contains all the component classes listed in 1.2.2 It is predefined<br />

so that you can use it without changes at your site. Typically, however, sites<br />

customize it. This classification is available only if your site has installed the<br />

Department or Enterprise Edition of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

• MCPMonx.y.z.<br />

This classification contains all component classes in the classification generalx.y.z.<br />

that apply to MCP systems (see 1.2.2).<br />

• OS2200Monx.y.z.<br />

This classification contains those component classes from the classification<br />

UnixMonx.y.z. that apply to OS2200 systems (see Appendix E).<br />

2–12 7833 4778–008


Setting Up <strong>Status</strong><br />

• MCPTapeMonx.y.z [MCP]<br />

This classification contains the MCP_Host and MCP_Tape component classes, with<br />

the site-defined attributes needed for the MCP Tape Monitor application.<br />

(See Appendix C for information on MCP tape monitoring.)<br />

• TapeMonx.y.z [OS 2200]<br />

This classification contains the 2200_Host and Tape component classes, with the<br />

site-defined attributes needed for the OS 2200 Tape Monitor application.<br />

(See Appendix B for information on OS 2200 tape monitoring.)<br />

• UnixMonx.y.z [UNIX]<br />

This classification contains the UNIX Resource Monitor component classes, each<br />

with a set of predefined attributes. (See Appendix D for the attributes specific to this<br />

classification.)<br />

• Unix2200Monx.y.z [OS 2200 UNIX]<br />

This predefined classification contains all the component classes in the generalx.y.z<br />

classification (see 1.2) that apply to OS 2200 and UNIX systems. Use this<br />

classification when <strong>Status</strong> is obtaining information from UNIX and OS 2200 nodes in<br />

a ClearPath Plus or ClearPath IX server. (See Appendix E for information on using this<br />

classification.)<br />

2.3.2. Icon Files<br />

In the <strong>Status</strong> diagram and subgroup windows, <strong>Status</strong> can display icons of two types:<br />

• Bitmap icons<br />

Bitmap icons are single-color icons. This color changes to represent the various<br />

states the icon can represent:<br />

- Normal (green)<br />

- Attention (yellow)<br />

- Alarm (red)<br />

- Empty (gray)<br />

For all states, the icon has the same size and shape. Internally, a bitmap icon is<br />

defined by a single file using the xbm format.<br />

• Pixmap icons<br />

Pixmap icons are multicolored icons. The size, shape, and color of these icons can<br />

change for each of the states the icon can represent:<br />

- Normal<br />

- Attention<br />

7833 4778–008 2–13


Setting Up <strong>Status</strong><br />

- Alarm<br />

- Empty<br />

Internally, a family of four icon files, one for each state, defines a pixmap icon. The<br />

format of pixmap icons can be<br />

- bmp<br />

- jpeg<br />

- pbm<br />

- pgm<br />

- png<br />

- pnm<br />

- ppm<br />

- tiff<br />

- xpm<br />

All icons in one family must be of the same format.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> includes two unique pixmap icon definitions for each component class in the<br />

predefined classifications and two pixmaps for generic icons. Pixmaps with names that<br />

end with “_lg” are 50 by 50 pixels; pixmaps with names ending with “_sm” are 30<br />

pixels wide by 25 pixels high. For a list of the pixmap icons supplied with <strong>Status</strong>,<br />

see Appendix F.<br />

The icon files reside in sp-data-folder\status\xbm, where sp-data-folder is the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> data folder specified during the installation of the server version of Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong>. The icons in this folder must have the correct file extension. For<br />

example, bitmap icons must have the .xbm file extension. For further information on icon<br />

file types and defining icon families, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

Note: In Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Level 7.4, the icons supplied with <strong>Status</strong> changed<br />

from bitmap icons to pixmap icons with a more modern three-dimensional appearance.<br />

Diagrams you have defined using previous levels of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> can continue<br />

to use the obsolete bitmap icons or you can modernize your <strong>Status</strong> displays with a single<br />

operation if you choose. See 5.1.5 and 7.3.5 for more information.<br />

See 5.1.5 and 7.3.5 for instructions on selecting icons for <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

2–14 7833 4778–008


2.3.3. Resource Sets<br />

Setting Up <strong>Status</strong><br />

A resource set controls the colors and fonts used in various <strong>Status</strong> displays. <strong>Status</strong><br />

provides a number of resource sets from which you can choose. Your site administrator<br />

can use Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration to specify a default resource set for each<br />

user. For details, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

While <strong>Status</strong> is running, you can select a different resource set if you want different<br />

fonts used to display headers and values in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram and component tables.<br />

For information about changing resource sets, see 2.5.<br />

2.3.4. Configurations<br />

2.3.5. <strong>User</strong>s<br />

A configuration describes the consoles and hosts monitored by <strong>Status</strong>, and the<br />

connections between these consoles and hosts. Because you can use <strong>Status</strong> to monitor<br />

different combinations of consoles and hosts, you can define many different<br />

configurations for <strong>Status</strong>. You can use only one of the defined configurations at a time.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> uses the same configuration definitions used by Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console.<br />

Use Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration to define configurations. For details, see the<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

The definitions of classifications, configurations, and resource sets are independent, as<br />

explained in the following table:<br />

You can select a different... Without changing or reselecting the...<br />

Classification Configuration or resource set<br />

Configuration Classification or resource set<br />

Resource set Classification or configuration<br />

<strong>User</strong> definitions provide a means to restrict certain <strong>Status</strong> operations. <strong>Status</strong> uses the<br />

same definitions of users and user classes that are defined using the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Configuration application and used by Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. Each<br />

user definition is associated with a specific configuration; many users can be associated<br />

with one configuration. Your site administrator can use Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Configuration to specify which <strong>Status</strong> functions are prohibited for each user class as well<br />

as to specify a default resource set for each user. For details, see the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

2.3.6. Diagram Definitions<br />

A diagram definition controls the operation of <strong>Status</strong> and the physical appearance of the<br />

<strong>Status</strong> diagram and other <strong>Status</strong> windows. It includes the following information:<br />

7833 4778–008 2–15


Setting Up <strong>Status</strong><br />

• Definitions of component groups and how the icons representing them are arranged<br />

in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram and other group windows. Each component group is a<br />

collection of components your site has decided to monitor through a single icon in<br />

the <strong>Status</strong> diagram. For further information about the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, see 3.2.<br />

Typically, when you click an icon that represents a component group, a table opens<br />

listing all components belonging to that group. For a large group, you might want to<br />

define subgroups. When you click the icon for such a group, a lower level group<br />

window opens instead of a table. You can nest component groups in this hierarchical<br />

fashion to any depth.<br />

• Definitions of component table templates. A component table displays information<br />

about individual components and their attributes. A template determines which<br />

attributes (columns) appear in the table, and in what order. For further information<br />

about component tables, see 3.4.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> provides three default diagram definitions:<br />

• Each Host Class Combination<br />

The diagram definition contains a component group for each combination of host in<br />

the configuration and class in the classification. The icons are arranged in rows by<br />

host and in columns by class.<br />

• Each Class<br />

The diagram definition contains a component group for each class in the<br />

classification, with components from all hosts represented in each component group.<br />

The icons are arranged automatically in one to three rows, depending on the number<br />

of component classes.<br />

• Each Class With Subgroups For Each Host (Department and Enterprise Editions only)<br />

The diagram definition contains a component group for each class in the<br />

classification. Each of these groups has a subgroup defined for each host in the<br />

configuration.<br />

This choice creates a <strong>Status</strong> diagram that contains one group for each component<br />

class, just as the second choice does. In addition, each top-level group has a<br />

subgroup window that contains one group for each host to which the component<br />

class applies.<br />

For all diagram definitions, only the <strong>Status</strong> diagram window is initially displayed.<br />

You can use these default diagram definitions as they are, or you can use them as<br />

starting points for defining customized diagram definitions.<br />

You can change the groups and tables that compose a diagram definition while <strong>Status</strong> is<br />

running. If you create a combination of groups and tables that you want to save, you can<br />

save this combination either as a new diagram definition or as a replacement of the<br />

original diagram definition. For details, see Section 5.<br />

Each diagram definition is associated with one specific combination of classification and<br />

configuration. However, multiple diagram definitions can be associated with the same<br />

2–16 7833 4778–008


Setting Up <strong>Status</strong><br />

combination of classification and configuration. This illustration shows the relationship of<br />

diagram definitions to classifications and configurations.<br />

Diagrams for<br />

Classification A<br />

and<br />

Configuration 1<br />

Diagram A<br />

Diagram B<br />

Diagram C<br />

Classification<br />

A<br />

Configuration<br />

1<br />

Diagrams for<br />

Classification B<br />

and<br />

Configuration 1<br />

Diagram A<br />

Diagram D<br />

Diagrams for<br />

Classification A<br />

and<br />

Configuration 2<br />

Diagram A<br />

Diagram E<br />

Diagram F<br />

Diagram G<br />

Classification<br />

B<br />

Configuration<br />

2<br />

Diagrams for<br />

Classification B<br />

and<br />

Configuration 2<br />

None<br />

Figure 2–6. Relationship of Diagram Definitions to Classifications and<br />

Configurations<br />

As illustrated here<br />

• Three diagram definitions are available when you select Configuration 1 and<br />

Classification A.<br />

• Two diagram definitions are available when you select Configuration 1 and<br />

Classification B.<br />

• Four diagram definitions are available when you select Configuration 2 and<br />

Classification A.<br />

• No diagram definitions are available when you select Configuration 2 and<br />

Classification B. In this case, <strong>Status</strong> asks you to select one of its default diagram<br />

definitions.<br />

All the diagram definitions here are distinct. Although a diagram definition named “A”<br />

exists for three combinations, each diagram definition named “A” is different from the<br />

others.<br />

2.3.7. Component Sets<br />

A component set is a named collection of explicitly defined components and the values<br />

of their specified attributes, such as Expected <strong>Status</strong> and Instruction File. (Specified<br />

attributes are component attributes whose values you specify within <strong>Status</strong>. Contrast<br />

this with reported attributes, whose values are set by external agents sending event<br />

reports to <strong>Status</strong>.)<br />

7833 4778–008 2–17


Setting Up <strong>Status</strong><br />

Your site can create component sets that include defined components from only<br />

selected hosts or classes. This lets you quickly change the expected values or instruction<br />

files for only a subset of the components being monitored, rather than for all the<br />

components. You may want to do this when certain events occur, such as a host<br />

changing from attended to unattended mode.<br />

Each component set definition is associated with one specific combination of<br />

classification and configuration. However, many component sets can be associated with<br />

the same combination of classification and configuration.<br />

Component sets are not associated with specific diagram definitions or users. Once you<br />

select a configuration and a classification to be monitored, you can select the diagram<br />

and component sets independently. You can also change these independently of each<br />

other.<br />

For further information about component sets, see Section 6.<br />

2–18 7833 4778–008


2.4. Starting and Terminating <strong>Status</strong><br />

Starting and Terminating <strong>Status</strong><br />

The following subsection describes different ways to start and stop a <strong>Status</strong> session.<br />

2.4.1. Starting <strong>Status</strong> from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console<br />

The standard way to start <strong>Status</strong> is from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console:<br />

1. Click the Applications menu in the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console main menu bar.<br />

2. The Applications pull-down menu appears. Click <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

3. After a short time, <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of available<br />

resource sets. Choose the desired resource set by double-clicking its name. (If a<br />

default resource set was specified for your user name using Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Configuration, this window is omitted and this default resource set is automatically<br />

selected. For further information, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.)<br />

4. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of available classifications. (This<br />

window is omitted if only one classification is available.) Choose the desired<br />

classification by double-clicking its name.<br />

5. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of component sets associated<br />

with the combination of the current configuration and the classification you selected.<br />

(This window is omitted if no component sets are associated with the combination.)<br />

Choose any subset of these component sets by clicking their names, and then<br />

clicking OK. The order in which you select component sets can be important,<br />

because information in one component set may override information in another. If<br />

you click Unknown, no component sets are selected.<br />

6. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of the diagram definitions<br />

associated with the combination of the current configuration and the classification<br />

you selected. (This window is omitted if only one diagram is associated with the<br />

combination.) Choose the desired diagram definition by double-clicking its name.<br />

After completing this procedure, <strong>Status</strong> determines which components belong in each<br />

component group and displays the selected <strong>Status</strong> diagram (see 3.2). <strong>Status</strong> is now<br />

started.<br />

When you start <strong>Status</strong> in this fashion, it automatically uses the configuration currently<br />

selected for the instance of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console from which you initiated<br />

<strong>Status</strong>. When you make any of the following changes in Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>, the<br />

same changes are automatically carried forward into <strong>Status</strong>:<br />

• Select Configuration.<br />

• Change to the Monitor attribute of any host or OS 2200 console (see 4.4, 4.5, and<br />

4.6).<br />

7833 4778–008 2–19


Starting and Terminating <strong>Status</strong><br />

2.4.2. Starting <strong>Status</strong> Independently of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Console<br />

You can also start <strong>Status</strong> independently of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, from the<br />

Windows Start Programs menu on a Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> workstation.<br />

Starting <strong>Status</strong> in this fashion lets you run <strong>Status</strong> with a configuration different from the<br />

configuration currently used by Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. It also allows you to run<br />

<strong>Status</strong> without also running Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console.<br />

When you start <strong>Status</strong> independently of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, you are asked<br />

to specify the Single Point Operation server, configuration, resource set, classification,<br />

component sets, and diagram, as follows:<br />

1. On a Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> workstation, click the Start button, then Programs, then<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>x.y.z, then Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

2. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> servers the<br />

workstation can connect to choose the desired server by double clicking its name.<br />

(This window is omitted if only one server is available.)<br />

3. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of available Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> configurations. (This window is omitted if only one configuration is<br />

available.) Choose the desired configuration by double-clicking its name. After you<br />

select the configuration, <strong>Status</strong> initializes communication with the various consoles<br />

and hosts defined in the configuration.<br />

4. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of available resource sets.<br />

Choose the desired resource set by double-clicking its name. (If a default resource<br />

set was specified for your user name using Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration,<br />

this window is omitted and the default resource set is automatically selected. For<br />

further information, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>.)<br />

5. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of available classifications. (This<br />

window is omitted if only one classification is available.) Choose the desired diagram<br />

by clicking its name.<br />

6. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of component sets associated<br />

with the combination of classification and configuration you selected. (This window is<br />

omitted if no component sets are associated with the combination.) Choose any<br />

subset of these component sets by clicking their names, and then clicking OK. The<br />

order in which you select component sets can be important, because information in<br />

one component set may override information in another. If you click Unknown, no<br />

component sets are selected.<br />

7. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of diagrams associated with the<br />

combination of configuration and classification selected. (This window is omitted if<br />

only one diagram is associated with the combination.) Choose the desired diagram<br />

by double-clicking its name.<br />

After you complete this procedure, <strong>Status</strong> determines which components belong in each<br />

component group and displays the selected <strong>Status</strong> diagram (see 3.2). <strong>Status</strong> is now<br />

started.<br />

2–20 7833 4778–008


Starting and Terminating <strong>Status</strong><br />

2.4.3. Automatic Environment Setup on Initialization<br />

Upon starting, <strong>Status</strong> examines the Windows environment variables SPOSERVER,<br />

SPCONFIG, SPUSER, SPCLASSIFICATION, SPDIAGRAM, and SPCOMPONENTSET. For<br />

each of these variables that is defined and has a nonnull value, <strong>Status</strong> uses the variable<br />

as the name of the server, configuration, classification, diagram, or component set and<br />

bypasses displaying the corresponding dialog window.<br />

If a configuration, classification, diagram, or component set does not exist with the<br />

specified name, <strong>Status</strong> displays a message and asks you to select another. You can<br />

specify any subset of these variables independently of the others, and they apply only<br />

when <strong>Status</strong> is started. They do not disable or affect the Select Configuration, Select<br />

Classification, Select Diagram, and Retrieve Component Set menu items after <strong>Status</strong> has<br />

started.<br />

If you start <strong>Status</strong> from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, <strong>Status</strong> ignores SPCONFIG<br />

because the configuration is taken from the current environment of Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Console.<br />

The environment variable SPCOMPONENTSET can contain several names separated by<br />

spaces. Also, if SPCOMPONENTSET is set to a null value, <strong>Status</strong> bypasses the “retrieve<br />

component set” dialog window without selecting any component sets.<br />

2.4.4. Terminating <strong>Status</strong><br />

If you started <strong>Status</strong> from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, terminating Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Console automatically terminates <strong>Status</strong>. To terminate <strong>Status</strong> before<br />

terminating Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, or to terminate <strong>Status</strong> when you started it<br />

independently of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console<br />

1. Click File in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar (see 3.2). <strong>Status</strong> displays the File menu.<br />

2. Click Exit. <strong>Status</strong> asks if you want to quit.<br />

3. Click OK. This terminates <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

If you have made changes to the current diagram that you have not saved, <strong>Status</strong> asks<br />

whether you want to save these changes before it terminates.<br />

7833 4778–008 2–21


Changing the <strong>Status</strong> Environment<br />

2.5. Changing the <strong>Status</strong> Environment<br />

Depending on whether you start <strong>Status</strong> from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console or<br />

independently, you can make various changes to the <strong>Status</strong> environment. For example,<br />

while running <strong>Status</strong>, you may want to<br />

• Select a different diagram definition<br />

• Retrieve additional component sets<br />

• Select a different configuration<br />

• Select a different resource set<br />

• Select a different trace level<br />

The File menu in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram (see 3.2) lets you make these selections.<br />

This subsection explains how to select a different classification, configuration, resource<br />

set, and trace level. For information about selecting a different diagram definition,<br />

see 5.5. For information about retrieving additional component sets, see 6.4.<br />

2.5.1. Selecting a Different Classification<br />

To select a different classification<br />

1. Click File in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar.<br />

2. <strong>Status</strong> displays the File menu. Click Select Classification.<br />

3. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of all available classifications.<br />

Select the desired classification. (Select Cancel if you decide not to change<br />

classifications.)<br />

4. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of all component sets<br />

associated with the new combination of classification and configuration, and asks<br />

you to select the component sets you want, if any. Select the desired component<br />

sets.<br />

5. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of all diagram definitions<br />

associated with the new combination of classification and configuration, and asks<br />

you to select a diagram definition. When you select a diagram definition, <strong>Status</strong><br />

displays it. If the new combination of configuration and classification has only one<br />

diagram definition, <strong>Status</strong> does not display this dialog window and automatically<br />

selects that diagram definition.<br />

For example, you can perform this procedure to change from the classification<br />

generalx.y.z to the classification TapeMonx.y.z in order to access the Tape Monitor<br />

application.<br />

2.5.2. Selecting a Different Configuration<br />

If you started <strong>Status</strong> from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, the configuration used by<br />

<strong>Status</strong> changes automatically when you select a different configuration in Single Point<br />

2–22 7833 4778–008


Changing the <strong>Status</strong> Environment<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Console. You cannot change the current configuration directly from <strong>Status</strong> in<br />

this case.<br />

If you started <strong>Status</strong> independently of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, you can replace<br />

the current configuration being monitored by <strong>Status</strong> with any other configuration<br />

available to <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

To replace the current configuration<br />

1. Click File in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar.<br />

2. <strong>Status</strong> displays the File menu. Click Select Configuration.<br />

3. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of all available configurations.<br />

Select the desired configuration. (Select Cancel if you decide not to change<br />

configurations.)<br />

4. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of all component sets<br />

associated with the new configuration and the current classification, and asks you to<br />

select the component sets you want, if any. Select the desired component sets.<br />

5. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of the diagram definitions<br />

associated with the new configuration and the current classification, and asks you to<br />

select a diagram definition. When you select a diagram definition, <strong>Status</strong> displays it.<br />

If the new combination of configuration and classification has only one diagram<br />

definition, <strong>Status</strong> does not display the dialog window and automatically selects that<br />

diagram definition.<br />

When you initiate a configuration change, <strong>Status</strong><br />

• Terminates its connection with each console and host of the current configuration<br />

• Clears any outstanding alarms that it initiated<br />

• Initiates a connection with each console and host in the new configuration, and, if<br />

applicable, initiates the OS 2200 or MCP data collection process<br />

2.5.3. Selecting a Different Resource Set<br />

You can replace the resource set <strong>Status</strong> is currently using with any other available<br />

resource set as follows:<br />

1. Click File in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays a pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Select Resource Set. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window showing the names of all<br />

currently defined resource sets.<br />

3. Select a new resource set, or select Cancel if you decide not to change the resource<br />

set. <strong>Status</strong> reads the resource set specification and changes all open displays to the<br />

new colors and fonts.<br />

7833 4778–008 2–23


Changing the <strong>Status</strong> Environment<br />

2.5.4. Selecting a Different Trace Level<br />

For help in debugging event reports sent to <strong>Status</strong> by SMART AMS, CP-AMS, SP-AMS,<br />

and other sources, you can have trace information sent to the log SP-STATUS. You can<br />

view files in this log with the Log Viewer, which is described in the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Console <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>. Normally, <strong>Status</strong> writes no messages to this log.<br />

To turn tracing on or off for <strong>Status</strong><br />

1. Click File in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar.<br />

2. Click Select Trace Level.<br />

3. Select the level of tracing you want:<br />

• None—no trace messages are written to the log.<br />

• Partial—event reports received by <strong>Status</strong> that cannot be processed completely<br />

are written to the log, along with the reasons why they cannot be processed.<br />

• Full—all event reports received by <strong>Status</strong> are written to the log.<br />

After you set the trace level, it remains unchanged until you change it again or exit<br />

<strong>Status</strong>. For further information about the trace messages logged by <strong>Status</strong>,<br />

see Appendix A.<br />

2–24 7833 4778–008


Section 3<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Displays<br />

This section describes the following Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> displays:<br />

• <strong>Status</strong> windows<br />

• <strong>Status</strong> diagram<br />

• Subgroup windows<br />

• Component tables<br />

• Attribute list<br />

• Dialog windows<br />

7833 4778–008 3–1


<strong>Status</strong> Windows<br />

3.1. <strong>Status</strong> Windows<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> windows enable you to monitor components and retrieve<br />

detailed information about components. The <strong>Status</strong> diagram is the primary window<br />

because it lets you see a summary of all components at a glance. The other <strong>Status</strong><br />

windows are secondary windows; they let you view detailed information about one<br />

component or a subset of components.<br />

Typically, you keep the <strong>Status</strong> diagram (the primary window) on the screen at all times,<br />

and bring up secondary windows only when you need more detailed information.<br />

3.1.1. Window Features<br />

Each <strong>Status</strong> window has a title identifying its purpose and a menu bar that, at a<br />

minimum, lets you close the window and display help text about the window. If the<br />

display size is larger than the window, scroll bars are added so you can see the entire<br />

display. You can also control the size and location of each window by using the mouse.<br />

The following illustration shows the display features. The title of the window appears on<br />

the first line. The second line is the menu bar (the selections here are Window, Edit, and<br />

Help). Note the presence of vertical and horizontal scroll bars.<br />

Figure 3–1. <strong>Status</strong> Window Features<br />

3–2 7833 4778–008


3.2. <strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

The <strong>Status</strong> diagram is the primary window of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> and appears<br />

automatically when you start <strong>Status</strong>. You cannot close the <strong>Status</strong> diagram except when<br />

you terminate <strong>Status</strong>. However, it disappears momentarily when you perform certain<br />

operations.<br />

The <strong>Status</strong> diagram enables you to see a summary of all highest-level component groups<br />

at a glance. This window contains a number of icons, each representing one component<br />

group. A component group is a collection of components selected according to sitedefined<br />

criteria based on the names, classes, and hosts of the individual components.<br />

Your site defines the component groups, the shapes of the icons representing them, and<br />

the arrangement of icons in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, as described in Section 5.<br />

This illustration is an example of the <strong>Status</strong> diagram for the classification generalx.y.z.<br />

Figure 3–2. Example of a <strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

Note: The <strong>Status</strong> diagram has no scroll bars. If you change the size of the <strong>Status</strong><br />

diagram using the window manager, the icons are repositioned proportionally within the<br />

display.<br />

3.2.1. Icon Descriptions<br />

Each icon in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram is unique to depict the four different icon states. The<br />

different colors and shapes indicate how the actual values of component attributes for<br />

7833 4778–008 3–3


<strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

each component group compare to expected values. This lets you see at a glance which<br />

component groups contain components that currently need attention. The icons change<br />

dynamically to reflect the current attribute values of components in each group.<br />

This table describes the icon scheme available with the pixmap icons supplied with<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

Color and Shape Attention Level Description<br />

Green circle No attention No component in the group requires<br />

attention. There are no exceptions<br />

not marked as Seen. A component<br />

has an exception when the actual<br />

value of a component attribute does<br />

not match one of the expected<br />

values defined for the attribute. An<br />

exception is marked as Seen when<br />

the attribute Seen for the<br />

component is set to yes.<br />

Yellow triangle Attention At least one component in the group<br />

has an attention-level exception not<br />

marked as Seen. An attention-level<br />

exception exists if any actual<br />

attribute of the component does not<br />

match any of its expected or alarm<br />

values. No component has an<br />

alarm-level exception not marked as<br />

Seen.<br />

Red octagon Alarm At least one component in the group<br />

has an alarm-level exception not<br />

marked as Seen. An alarm-level<br />

exception exists if any actual<br />

attribute of the component matches<br />

any of its alarm values.<br />

An alarm-level exception may cause<br />

<strong>Status</strong> to raise an alarm in Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. This<br />

occurs only if the component class<br />

had alarm text specified when the<br />

classification was defined using<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Configuration. Depending on the<br />

alarm-id specified for the attribute,<br />

an alarm can trigger external actions<br />

defined in the active alarm policy.<br />

For further information, see Section<br />

7 and the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Administration and Configuration<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

Blue square Empty The group currently contains no<br />

components.<br />

3–4 7833 4778–008


3.2.2. How the <strong>Status</strong> Diagram Is Updated<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

<strong>Status</strong> automatically updates the <strong>Status</strong> diagram to reflect the current attribute values of<br />

all components. If a component group contains exactly one component with an<br />

attention-level exception, any of the following actions changes the icon from a yellow<br />

triangle (attention) to a green circle (no attention):<br />

• <strong>Status</strong> receives an event report for the component that changes the value of the<br />

status attribute that caused the exception to an expected value.<br />

• You change the expected values associated with the status attribute that caused the<br />

exception to include the current value of the attribute.<br />

• <strong>Status</strong> receives an event report for the component that changes the value of a<br />

numeric attribute so that it is now within the attention threshold range.<br />

• You change a numeric attention threshold value so that the current value of the<br />

numeric attribute is now within the attention threshold range.<br />

• You set the value of the Seen attribute for the component to yes.<br />

Any of the following actions changes the icon to a red octagon (alarm), if it is not already<br />

a red octagon:<br />

• <strong>Status</strong> receives an event report for the component that changes the value of a status<br />

attribute to an alarm value.<br />

• You change the alarm values associated with a status attribute to include the current<br />

value of the status attribute.<br />

• <strong>Status</strong> receives an event report for the component that changes the value of a<br />

numeric attribute so that it is below the minimum alarm threshold value or above the<br />

maximum alarm threshold value.<br />

• You change a numeric alarm threshold value so that the current value of the numeric<br />

attribute is now outside the alarm threshold range.<br />

• You set the value of the Seen attribute from yes to no, and the component has at<br />

least one attribute with an alarm value.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> automatically resets the Seen attribute for a component to no whenever<br />

• The value of a status or numeric attribute changes because an event report was<br />

received.<br />

• You change an expected, alarm, or threshold value.<br />

This ensures that previously setting the Seen attribute to yes does not mask a new<br />

exception.<br />

7833 4778–008 3–5


<strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

3.2.3. Operator Action<br />

When an icon change in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram indicates an exception, you should determine<br />

the specific component causing the exception and take corrective action, if necessary.<br />

To do this, click the icon of interest. <strong>Status</strong> then responds as described in the following<br />

table.<br />

If... Then...<br />

The component group has subgroups <strong>Status</strong> opens a subgroup window, which<br />

contains an icon for each subgroup in the<br />

parent group. If any component in a subgroup<br />

reaches the attention or alarm exception level,<br />

the icons of both the subgroup and the parent<br />

group are affected.<br />

There is no table template associated<br />

with the component group, and there<br />

is only one component in the group<br />

There is no table template associated<br />

with the component group, and there<br />

is more than one component in the<br />

group<br />

There is exactly one table template<br />

associated with the component group<br />

There are multiple table templates<br />

associated with the component group<br />

<strong>Status</strong> displays the attribute list for that<br />

component immediately.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window listing all<br />

components in the group. Select the<br />

component of interest from the dialogue<br />

window. <strong>Status</strong> displays the attribute list for<br />

that component.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> immediately displays a component table<br />

using that template.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing the<br />

names of all the table templates. Select the<br />

template for the table that you want to display.<br />

For further information about subgroups, see 3.3. For further information about<br />

component tables, see 3.4. For further information about attribute lists, see 3.5.<br />

3–6 7833 4778–008


3.2.4. Pull-Down Menus<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

The <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar lets you display five pull-down menus: File, Tables,<br />

Diagrams, Component Sets, and Help.<br />

Click File to display the File menu. Use the File menu to make various changes to the<br />

<strong>Status</strong> environment, such as selecting a different diagram definition, classification,<br />

configuration, or resource set; retrieving component sets; and terminating <strong>Status</strong>. For<br />

further information, see 2.5.<br />

Click Tables to display the Tables menu. Use the Tables menu to display the following<br />

tables:<br />

• Components with Unexpected Values<br />

• Components with Notes<br />

• Unreported Components<br />

For further information, see 3.4.<br />

Click Diagrams to display the Diagrams menu. Use the Diagrams menu to define, save,<br />

and delete diagram definitions. For further information, see Section 5.<br />

7833 4778–008 3–7


<strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

Click Component Sets to display the Component Sets menu. Use the Component Sets<br />

menu to define, save, and delete component sets, and to remove unreported<br />

components. For further information, see Section 6.<br />

Click Help to display the Help menu. From this menu, you can display information about<br />

the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, a summary of current information, or you can view the online Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> document library.<br />

The About entry displays a summary of current information, which includes<br />

• Application name (<strong>Unisys</strong> Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>)<br />

• Product level<br />

• Product edition<br />

• Copyright notice<br />

• Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server name<br />

• Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> workstation name<br />

• Name of secondary Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server (if defined)<br />

• Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> installation folder<br />

• Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> data folder<br />

• Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> log folder<br />

• Current configuration<br />

• Current user<br />

• Current classification<br />

• Current diagram definition<br />

3–8 7833 4778–008


3.2.5. Window Backgrounds<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

The background of a window is the fixed graphic that is displayed in the window behind<br />

any icons displayed in the window. <strong>Status</strong> allows you to select a background for the<br />

<strong>Status</strong> diagram, as well as any subgroup windows.<br />

These backgrounds are of fixed size. If the background is smaller than the window, it is<br />

tiled; if the background is larger, it is truncated. When you resize a component group<br />

window, the icons within it are adjusted proportionally, so the icons move in relation to<br />

the background.<br />

The files defining the backgrounds you can select are located in the folder named<br />

backgrounds in the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> data folder on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

server. When Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> is installed, it includes a number of background<br />

files. You can define additional backgrounds using various graphical tools and add them<br />

to this folder.<br />

The formats that you can use for backgrounds are<br />

• xbm (2-color)<br />

• xpm (color)<br />

• tif (color)<br />

• jpg (color)<br />

• bmp (color)<br />

• png (color)<br />

• pbm (black and white)<br />

• pgm (grayscale)<br />

• pnm (color)<br />

• ppm (color)<br />

These formats are the same formats used for icons within the <strong>Status</strong> diagram.<br />

7833 4778–008 3–9


Subgroup Windows<br />

3.3. Subgroup Windows<br />

The <strong>Status</strong> diagram contains an icon for each highest-level component group defined in<br />

the current diagram definition. In a simple environment, it is the only group window.<br />

In a more complex environment, you may wish to define component groups in a<br />

hierarchical fashion. At the highest level, you might define only a few fairly large groups,<br />

each containing many components. Only the icons for these highest-level groups appear<br />

in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram. The components in these highest-level groups can be further<br />

categorized into subgroups.<br />

As an example, the <strong>Status</strong> diagram might contain a group labeled Tapes, representing all<br />

tape drives across all systems being monitored. This parent group could contain a<br />

subgroup for each different system. Each subgroup would contain only the tape drives<br />

for a single system.<br />

When you click the icon of a parent group that has subgroups, a subgroup window<br />

opens. A subgroup window appears and behaves very much like the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, but<br />

contains icons only for the subgroups belonging to its parent group. Each icon in a<br />

subgroup window varies in appearance just as those in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram. The actions<br />

that occur when you click one of these icons are the same as the actions that occur in<br />

the <strong>Status</strong> diagram.<br />

3.3.1. Pull-Down Menus<br />

Subgroup windows have a menu structure similar to that of the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, but<br />

simpler.<br />

Subgroup windows contain the following menus:<br />

From the Help menu, you can display information about the subgroup window.<br />

3–10 7833 4778–008


3.4. Component Tables<br />

Component Tables<br />

Component tables display information about the attributes of specific components.<br />

There are five types of component tables; each has a different function. This table<br />

describes the types of component tables.<br />

Table Type Components Displayed<br />

Component Group Either all components in a particular component group<br />

(static behavior), or components in a particular<br />

component group that have exceptions not marked as<br />

Seen (dynamic behavior)<br />

Components with<br />

Unexpected Values<br />

All components that currently have exceptions not<br />

marked as Seen<br />

Components with Notes All components that currently have operator notes<br />

associated with them<br />

Unreported Components All components for which no event reports were<br />

received<br />

Identical Components All components that represent the same physical<br />

component as a selected component<br />

3.4.1. Component Group Tables<br />

A Component Group table provides information about individual components in a<br />

component group. When you click an icon in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram or in a subgroup<br />

window and the component group is associated with a table template, a table appears<br />

using the template.<br />

This illustration shows a Component Group table.<br />

Figure 3–3. Component Group Table<br />

7833 4778–008 3–11


Component Tables<br />

The title bar identifies the component group associated with the table and displays the<br />

number of components in the table.<br />

The column headings identify the component attributes. Some attributes have actions<br />

associated with them; the column headings for these attributes appear in a different font<br />

(boldface, in the default resource set). To initiate the action, click the attribute value. For<br />

further information about the actions associated with each attribute, see Section 4.<br />

Click Help to display the Help menu. You can use this menu to display general<br />

information about the table, or to display information about an individual column in the<br />

table.<br />

If your user class permits you to delete components, you can use the Delete menu in the<br />

Component Group table, described later in this subsection.<br />

Display Behaviors<br />

<strong>Status</strong> lets you choose between two display behaviors for a Component Group table:<br />

• Static—the table contains a row for each component in the component group.<br />

• Dynamic—the table contains rows only for components in the group with exceptions<br />

not marked as Seen (those components with an attention or alarm attribute value<br />

and with Seen=no).<br />

Note: When you define a table template for a component group, you can specify<br />

whether the table is to be displayed as static or dynamic. If you do not specify this when<br />

you define the table template, then <strong>Status</strong> asks whether you want static or dynamic<br />

behavior before displaying a table using the template. For further information about<br />

defining table templates, see 5.2.<br />

Static Behavior<br />

A static Component Group table contains a row for each component in the component<br />

group represented by the corresponding <strong>Status</strong> diagram icon.<br />

The order of the rows in the table is as follows:<br />

• First, any components that currently have one or more exceptions, either alarm-level<br />

or attention-level, for which the Seen attribute is n<br />

• Next, any components that currently have one or more exceptions for which the<br />

Seen attribute is set to yes<br />

• Last, any components that currently have no exceptions<br />

Once a static Component Group table appears, the order of the rows does not change. If<br />

a component in the table later develops an exception, the position of the row does not<br />

change, even if it is near the bottom of the table.<br />

Dynamic Behavior<br />

A dynamic Component Group table contains a row for each component in the group with<br />

an exception not marked as Seen. A dynamic table may be empty at certain times. If a<br />

component in the group develops an exception after the table appears, a row for that<br />

3–12 7833 4778–008


Component Tables<br />

component is added to the bottom of the table. A row for a component disappears from<br />

the table if one of the following occurs:<br />

• The exceptions for the component are resolved after the table appears.<br />

• You set the Seen attribute for the component to yes.<br />

As rows are added and removed, the component count in the title of the table changes.<br />

Deleting Components<br />

If your user class permits you to delete components, each Component Group table has a<br />

Delete menu.<br />

To delete components<br />

• Click Delete. <strong>Status</strong> displays the Delete menu.<br />

• Click Delete Components. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window listing all components in<br />

the component group. Each component is identified as host.class.name.<br />

• Double-click to delete a single component. Click once on each component to select<br />

multiple components to be deleted, then click OK. <strong>Status</strong> deletes the selected<br />

components from the data model. Click Cancel if you decide not to delete any<br />

components.<br />

Note: If your user class does not permit you to delete components, the Component<br />

Group tables do not have a Delete menu.<br />

Templates<br />

A Component Group table template specifies the subset of component attributes that<br />

appear when you click a component group icon. <strong>Status</strong> allows you to define multiple<br />

Component Group table templates. Each component group can be associated with one<br />

or more of these table templates, and many component groups can be associated with<br />

the same table template.<br />

As installed, <strong>Status</strong> includes a few generic Component Group table templates, each with<br />

a small number of attributes (columns). The names of these templates indicate the<br />

columns they contain. Also included is a table template specifically intended for the Tape<br />

Monitor application.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> automatically creates a table template with the same name as the class for each<br />

component class in the current classification. Each of these table templates is<br />

specifically tailored to the associated class and contains columns for the site-defined<br />

attributes in the class.<br />

You can<br />

• Change the attribute columns included in these table templates and their order<br />

• Create new Component Group table templates<br />

• Change the table templates associated with each component group<br />

7833 4778–008 3–13


Component Tables<br />

For further information about these procedures, see 5.2.<br />

3.4.2. Components with Unexpected Values Table<br />

The Components with Unexpected Values table contains a row for each component that<br />

currently has at least one exception, either attention-level or alarm-level, and for which<br />

the Seen attribute is no.<br />

If you open this table from the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, it includes all such components currently<br />

monitored by <strong>Status</strong>. If you open this table from a subgroup window, it includes only<br />

components that are within the subgroup.<br />

This illustration shows a Components with Unexpected Values table.<br />

Figure 3–4. Components with Unexpected Values Table<br />

To display a Components with Unexpected Values table<br />

1. Click Tables in the menu bar of the <strong>Status</strong> diagram or a subgroup window. The<br />

Tables menu appears.<br />

2. Click Components with Unexpected Values.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> dynamically updates the following information in this table:<br />

• The attribute values displayed<br />

• The color highlighting of unexpected values for reported attributes<br />

• The rows in the table, as components develop exceptions and as exceptions are<br />

resolved or marked as Seen<br />

3–14 7833 4778–008


<strong>Status</strong> adds a row at the bottom of the table when<br />

Component Tables<br />

• A component not already in the table develops an exception because the actual value<br />

of an attribute changed or you changed an expected attribute value.<br />

• You reset the Seen attribute for a component with an exception from yes to no from<br />

another component table or attribute list.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> removes a row from the table when one the following occurs:<br />

• A component in the table has all its exceptions resolved because the actual values of<br />

attributes changed or you changed the expected attribute values.<br />

• You set the Seen attribute for a component in the table from no to yes.<br />

To change the Seen attribute from no to yes<br />

1. Click the current Seen attribute value. <strong>Status</strong> displays a window with choices yes or<br />

no.<br />

2. Click yes. The row for the component disappears from the table. (Click no if you<br />

decide not to change the Seen attribute.)<br />

Click Help to display the Help menu. You can use this menu to display general<br />

information about the table, or to display information about an individual column in the<br />

table.<br />

3.4.3. Components with Notes Table<br />

The Components with Notes table contains one row for each component that currently<br />

has a note file associated with it, and one row for each component for which you are<br />

editing a new note. If you open this table from the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, it includes all such<br />

components currently monitored by <strong>Status</strong>. If you open this table from a subgroup<br />

window, it includes only components that are in the subgroup.<br />

This table, shown here, lets you determine quickly which components currently have<br />

notes attached.<br />

7833 4778–008 3–15


Component Tables<br />

Figure 3–5. Components with Notes Table<br />

To display a Components with Notes table<br />

1. Click Tables in the menu bar of the <strong>Status</strong> diagram or a subgroup window. The<br />

Tables menu appears.<br />

2. Click Components with Notes.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> dynamically updates the values and the rows in the table. When you attach a<br />

note to a component that previously did not have one, <strong>Status</strong> adds a row for that<br />

component at the bottom of the table. When you delete a note for a component<br />

currently in the table, <strong>Status</strong> removes the row for that component from the table.<br />

Click Help to display the Help menu. You can use this menu to display general<br />

information about the table or to display information about an individual column in the<br />

table.<br />

3.4.4. Unreported Components Table<br />

The Unreported Components table contains one row for each unreported component. If<br />

you open this table from the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, it includes all such components currently<br />

monitored by <strong>Status</strong>. If you open this table from a subgroup window, it includes only<br />

components that are within the subgroup. The Unreported Components table lets you<br />

quickly identify unreported components.<br />

A component is unreported when you have defined a set of values for it, but <strong>Status</strong> has<br />

received no event report for it. The absence of an event report may indicate that the<br />

component does not actually exist in the host system, or that the process for generating<br />

event reports for the component is faulty. A component can exist for which no<br />

associated event reports were generated yet.<br />

This illustration shows an Unreported Components table.<br />

3–16 7833 4778–008


Figure 3–6. Unreported Components Table<br />

To display an Unreported Components table<br />

Component Tables<br />

1. Click Tables in the menu bar of the <strong>Status</strong> diagram or a subgroup window. The<br />

Tables menu appears.<br />

2. Click Unreported Components.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> dynamically updates the values and the rows in this table. When <strong>Status</strong> receives<br />

an event report for a component currently in the table, it removes the row for the<br />

component from the table.<br />

Click Help to display the Help menu. You can use this menu to display general<br />

information about the table or to display information about an individual column in the<br />

table.<br />

3.4.5. Identical Components Table<br />

Multiple <strong>Status</strong> components can refer to the same physical component, if the actual<br />

component is known or reported through multiple hosts. For example, three <strong>Status</strong><br />

components called P1 may all refer to the same printer used by hosts X, Y, and Z. Use<br />

an Identical Components table to display all <strong>Status</strong> components that refer to a particular<br />

physical component.<br />

This illustration is an example of an Identical Components table.<br />

7833 4778–008 3–17


Component Tables<br />

Figure 3–7. Identical Components Table<br />

To display an Identical Components table, click the Identical Components attribute in the<br />

attribute list for a component. For further information, see 4.2.<br />

An identical components table for a component identifies the component for which you<br />

opened it in its title. You can display an identical components table for more than one<br />

component at the same time.<br />

Click Help to display the Help menu. You can use this menu to display general<br />

information about the table or to display information about an individual column in the<br />

table.<br />

3–18 7833 4778–008


3.5. Attribute List<br />

Attribute List<br />

An attribute list shows all attributes that apply to one particular component. (Contrast<br />

this with a component table, which shows only selected attributes for many<br />

components.) The attribute list contains one line for each attribute. Each line contains<br />

the attribute name and attribute value. For site-defined attributes (see 4.3), the attribute<br />

name is determined from the class to which the component belongs. Each component<br />

class has a unique attribute list.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> dynamically updates values in an attribute list whenever the values change.<br />

Unexpected values are highlighted in color just as in the component tables. If you are<br />

using the default resource set, attention-level exceptions appear in yellow and alarm-level<br />

exceptions appear in red.<br />

For detailed information about individual attributes, see Section 4.<br />

The following illustration shows an attribute list.<br />

7833 4778–008 3–19


Attribute List<br />

Figure 3–8. Attribute List<br />

3.5.1. Displaying an Attribute List<br />

To display an attribute list for a component<br />

• Click the component name in any component table that includes the component. A<br />

pop-up menu appears. Click Attribute List in that menu. An hourglass appears for a<br />

3–20 7833 4778–008


Attribute List<br />

short time, and then the attribute list is displayed. (If the pop-up menu would contain<br />

only one item, the attribute list is displayed immediately.)<br />

• Click a group icon in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram. If the group does not contain subgroups<br />

and there is no table template associated with the group, an attribute list is<br />

displayed. If the group contains a single component, its attribute list appears<br />

immediately. If the group contains multiple components, a dialog window asks you<br />

to select which attribute list to display.<br />

3.5.2. Attribute List Menus<br />

The attribute list contains the following menus:<br />

• Window<br />

From this menu, you can print the attribute list or close it.<br />

• Display<br />

From this menu, you can display or edit the notes associated with the component,<br />

display the instructions defined for the component, or display the full Message value<br />

for the component.<br />

• Applications<br />

From this menu, you can launch an external application on behalf of the component.<br />

For further information on external applications, see 1.3.<br />

• Delete<br />

From this menu, you can delete the component displayed in the attribute list from<br />

the <strong>Status</strong> data model.<br />

• Help<br />

From this menu, you can display general information about the list or information<br />

about an individual attribute in the list.<br />

3.5.3. Initiating Actions<br />

Some attributes have actions associated with them; the names of these attributes<br />

appear in a different font (boldface, in the default resource set). To initiate the action,<br />

click the attribute name (not the attribute value). For further information about the<br />

actions associated with each attribute, see Section 4.<br />

7833 4778–008 3–21


Attribute List<br />

3.5.4. Deleting Components<br />

If your user class permits you to delete components, the attribute list has a Delete menu.<br />

To delete the component<br />

1. Click Delete. <strong>Status</strong> displays the Delete menu.<br />

2. Click Delete Component. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window and asks whether you<br />

really want to delete the component.<br />

3. Click Yes. <strong>Status</strong> deletes the component from the data model and closes the<br />

attribute list.<br />

Note: If your user class does not permit you to delete components, the attribute list<br />

does not have a Delete menu.<br />

3–22 7833 4778–008


3.6. Dialog Windows<br />

Dialog Windows<br />

A dialog window appears when <strong>Status</strong> prompts you for further information. These<br />

windows usually appear after you have selected a menu item that requires more<br />

information. This illustration shows a typical dialog window.<br />

3.6.1. Entering Information<br />

Figure 3–9. Dialog Window<br />

You can enter the requested information by clicking the choices displayed in the middle<br />

panel of the dialog window.<br />

In some dialog windows, you can select a single value or multiple values. To select a<br />

single value, double-click the value. To select multiple values, click once on each value,<br />

then click OK. To deselect a value you have already selected, click again on its<br />

highlighted value before you click OK.<br />

3.6.2. Dialog Window Buttons<br />

Most dialog windows provide the buttons listed in this table to help you edit your input.<br />

Button Function<br />

OK Closes the dialog window and sends your input to <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

Cancel Cancels and closes the dialog window. If you click Cancel, the operation<br />

you requested is not performed.<br />

Unknown Resets the value to Unknown and closes the dialog window; no value is<br />

specified for the attribute. If you are adding something, you must select a<br />

value other than Unknown. Click the Explain button to get specific<br />

information about Unknown for any particular dialog window.<br />

Clear Clears the current value from the input area; the dialog window remains<br />

open.<br />

7833 4778–008 3–23


Dialog Windows<br />

Button Function<br />

Editor Enables multiple lines of text to be entered.<br />

Explain Provides more information about the value you are asked to supply.<br />

Once you open a dialog window or any window that needs more information, you must<br />

provide the information or click Cancel to continue. <strong>Status</strong> does not allow you to open<br />

any other windows or perform any other actions until you have entered the information<br />

and closed the dialog window.<br />

Some dialog windows do not include a list of choices. For these windows, you must<br />

type on the input line. If the dialog window allows multiple values and you want to enter<br />

multiple values, press Enter after each value.<br />

In some situations, a dialog window might open with its buttons covered by the<br />

Windows icon bar. To view the buttons, use the mouse to move the icon bar.<br />

Note: <strong>Status</strong> accepts input only if the pointer is on the input line when you are typing in<br />

a new value.<br />

3–24 7833 4778–008


Section 4<br />

Component Attributes<br />

This section describes the component attributes displayed in attribute lists and<br />

component tables. The section provides information about<br />

• Types of attributes<br />

• Attributes that apply to all component classes<br />

• Site-defined attributes<br />

• Attributes specific to various component classes<br />

7833 4778–008 4–1


Types of Attributes<br />

4.1. Types of Attributes<br />

Attributes can be categorized in a number of different ways, as described in the following<br />

subsections.<br />

4.1.1. Reported and Specified Attributes<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> maintains information about components in the form of<br />

attributes. An attribute is a named property of a component; it can have certain values<br />

that describe an aspect of the current state of the component. Attributes appear in<br />

component tables and attribute lists.<br />

There are two categories of attributes based on the source of the attribute values. This<br />

table explains each category.<br />

Category Source of Attribute Values<br />

Reported attributes Values come from event reports from a managed host, an<br />

application program, a system console, or from Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> itself. There are four types of reported attributes:<br />

status attributes, string attributes, numeric attributes, and list<br />

attributes.<br />

Specified attributes Values are specified within <strong>Status</strong> by you or by the Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator.<br />

4.1.2. Attribute Data Types<br />

There are four types of attributes in <strong>Status</strong> based on the data values the attribute can<br />

attain:<br />

• <strong>Status</strong> attributes<br />

These attributes can attain any one of a limited number of predefined character<br />

string values. Each of these predefined values can be classified as expected,<br />

attention, or alarm.<br />

• String attributes<br />

These attributes can attain any character string value.<br />

• Numeric attributes<br />

These attributes can attain any integer value. Ranges of these values can be<br />

classified as expected, attention, or alarm.<br />

• List attributes<br />

These attributes can assume multiple character strings as their values.<br />

4–2 7833 4778–008


4.1.3. <strong>Status</strong> Attributes<br />

Types of Attributes<br />

A status attribute can assume one of a limited number of predefined character string<br />

values (for example, up or down). Two specified attributes are associated with each<br />

status attribute:<br />

• An attribute listing the expected values of the status attribute (for example, up)<br />

• An attribute listing the alarm values of the status attribute (for example, down)<br />

For each status attribute, you select the expected and alarm values for each component.<br />

Any values that are not designated as expected or alarm values are considered attention<br />

values. When the value of a status attribute is an expected value, it is of no concern to<br />

the operator. If the value of the status attribute changes to an alarm or attention value,<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> directs the operator's attention to this change.<br />

If the value of a status attribute changes to an alarm value, <strong>Status</strong> can be configured to<br />

raise an alarm in Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. This occurs only if the component<br />

class has alarm text specified and an alarm-id has been specified for the attribute. These<br />

are specified using Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration as described in 7.5. Depending<br />

on the alarm-id specified for the attribute, an alarm can trigger external actions defined in<br />

the active alarm policy.<br />

The Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator can define up to eight site-defined status<br />

attributes for each component class. The names and allowed values of the site-defined<br />

status attributes vary from one component class to another.<br />

By default, all components monitored by <strong>Status</strong> have one status attribute with the name<br />

of “<strong>Status</strong>.” The Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator can change the name of this<br />

attribute or eliminate it entirely. This attribute reports the primary state of each<br />

component.<br />

Each status attribute can have a timeout period and default value. If the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> administrator specifies a timeout period, <strong>Status</strong> automatically resets the<br />

attribute to its default value if no event report is received for the attribute during the<br />

timeout period. This is useful, for example, when an agent reports the attribute value on<br />

a periodic basis, and you want to be notified if this agents stops reporting.<br />

[OS 2200]<br />

For OS 2200 systems, the OS 2200 data collector reports a value for the default <strong>Status</strong><br />

attribute for each hardware component other than the system consoles. The OS 2200<br />

data collector is part of the OMKEY background run.<br />

The possible values for the default <strong>Status</strong> attribute of OS 2200 hardware components are<br />

as follows:<br />

• UP<br />

• DOWN<br />

• SUSPENDED<br />

• RESERVED<br />

7833 4778–008 4–3


Types of Attributes<br />

• NOT AVAILABLE<br />

For all types of OS 2200 hardware components, <strong>Status</strong> attribute values in event reports<br />

are all uppercase.<br />

[MCP]<br />

For MCP systems, the MCP data collector reports a value for the default <strong>Status</strong> attribute<br />

of disk drive, tape drive, and printer hardware components. The MCP data collector is<br />

part of the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface for ClearPath MCP.<br />

4.1.4. String Attributes<br />

A string attribute can assume any character string as its value. There is no limit to the<br />

length of the character string. However, various displays in <strong>Status</strong> may show only the<br />

initial portion of long strings.<br />

You cannot specify expected values and alarm values for a string attribute. You can use<br />

string attributes to display values of interest to an operator but not to direct the<br />

operator's attention to a component.<br />

All components monitored by <strong>Status</strong> have two string attributes named Message and<br />

Event Report Time. The Message attribute lets your site associate any message text<br />

with a component; the Event Report Time attribute (TIME) identifies when the latest<br />

event report associated with the component was received.<br />

The Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator can define up to eight additional site-defined<br />

string attributes for each component class. The names of these site-defined string<br />

attributes vary from one component class to another. When defining a classification<br />

using the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration application, the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

administrator can associate each site-defined string attribute with a status or numeric<br />

attribute in the same component class. If the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator does<br />

this, <strong>Status</strong> displays the string attribute with the same color coding as the associated<br />

attribute. For further information, see Section 7.<br />

4.1.5. Numeric Attributes<br />

A numeric attribute can assume any integer as its value. You can designate ranges of<br />

these values as expected, attention, and alarm values. Do this using two pairs of<br />

specified attributes that are associated with each numeric attribute:<br />

• Minimum and maximum attention threshold values<br />

• Minimum and maximum alarm threshold values<br />

You can specify these threshold values component by component, and you can leave any<br />

or all of them unspecified.<br />

If you specify all four threshold values, the values of the attribute are split into five<br />

ranges, as follows:<br />

4–4 7833 4778–008


Types of Attributes<br />

When the value of a numeric attribute is in range C, between the minimum and<br />

maximum attention threshold values (inclusive), it is considered an expected value and of<br />

no concern to the operator.<br />

If the attribute value falls below the minimum attention threshold but is still above the<br />

minimum alarm threshold, it is in range B. If the attribute value rises above the<br />

maximum attention threshold but is still below the maximum alarm threshold, it is in<br />

range D. Within either of these ranges, the component has an attention-level exception.<br />

This is brought to your attention by an icon changing color or shape in the <strong>Status</strong><br />

diagram. By default, attention-level exceptions are shown by an icon becoming yellow.<br />

If the attribute value falls below the minimum alarm threshold, it is in range A. If the<br />

attribute rises above the maximum alarm threshold, it is in range E. Within either of<br />

these ranges, the component has an alarm-level exception. This is brought to your<br />

attention by an icon changing color or shape in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram. By default, alarmlevel<br />

exceptions are shown by an icon becoming red. In addition, <strong>Status</strong> can be<br />

configured to raise an alarm in Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console for an alarm-level<br />

exception. This occurs only if the component class has alarm text specified and an<br />

alarm-id has been specified for the attribute. These are specified using Configuration<br />

application, as described in 7.3 and 7.5. Depending on the alarm-id specified for the<br />

attribute, an alarm raised by <strong>Status</strong> can trigger external actions defined in the active<br />

alarm policy.<br />

The Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator can define up to eight site-defined numeric<br />

attributes for each component class. The names and threshold values of the site-defined<br />

numeric attributes vary from one component class to another. For further information,<br />

see 7.5.<br />

4.1.6. List Attributes<br />

A list attribute can simultaneously assume any number of character strings as its value.<br />

There is no limit to the number of character strings or to the length of each character<br />

string. However, various displays in <strong>Status</strong> may show only the initial item of a list.<br />

You cannot specify expected and alarm values for a list attribute. You can use list<br />

attributes to display values of interest to an operator but not to direct the operator's<br />

attention to a component.<br />

7833 4778–008 4–5


Attributes That Apply to All Component Classes<br />

4.2. Attributes That Apply to All Component<br />

Classes<br />

4.2.1. Name<br />

4.2.2. Host<br />

4.2.3. Class<br />

This attribute identifies the name of the component as it is known to the host or agent<br />

that reports its attributes. Once a component has been created in <strong>Status</strong>, its name<br />

cannot change.<br />

If you click the Name attribute in a component table, a pop-up menu appears. This menu<br />

allows you to display the attribute list for that component, edit or display the notes<br />

associated with that component, display the instructions defined for that component,<br />

display the full Message value for that component, or launch an external application on<br />

behalf of that component. Only applicable items are included in this menu. If displaying<br />

the attribute list would be the only choice, the attribute list opens immediately instead.<br />

This attribute identifies the name of the host system that reports the attribute values of<br />

the component. The host is one of those specified in the configuration under which<br />

<strong>Status</strong> is currently operating. For a component which itself represents a host system,<br />

the Name and Host attributes have the same value. When you click the Host attribute,<br />

no action occurs.<br />

This attribute identifies the component class to which the component belongs. When<br />

you click the Class attribute, no action occurs.<br />

[OS 2200]<br />

Typically, the class of a component never changes once the component has been<br />

created. However, when <strong>Status</strong> receives an event report identifying a component of the<br />

Device class more specifically as a disk drive or tape drive, it changes the class<br />

accordingly. The Device class is defined in classifications general (see 1.3.2),<br />

Unix2200Mon, and OS2200Mon see (Appendix E).<br />

4.2.4. Exceptions<br />

This attribute shows the number of exceptions currently outstanding for the component.<br />

Each reported attribute with an unexpected value (attention or alarm) counts as one<br />

exception. When there are one or more exceptions for a component, the Exceptions<br />

attribute in component tables and attribute lists is displayed in the colors of the most<br />

severe exception. This is red for alarm exceptions and yellow for attention exceptions.<br />

Click the Exceptions attribute to display the Instructions window for the component.<br />

This window contains any operator instructions your site has defined for the component.<br />

4–6 7833 4778–008


4.2.5. Seen<br />

4.2.6. Notes<br />

Attributes That Apply to All Component Classes<br />

This specified attribute indicates whether you have noted the exceptions (if any)<br />

associated with the component and no longer want this component to affect icon colors<br />

in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram. The Seen attribute can have the value yes or no. If your user class<br />

allows it, you can change this value.<br />

When the value is yes, the component<br />

• Does not cause any component group icons to change color.<br />

• Does not appear in the Components with Unexpected Values table or in any dynamic<br />

Component Group table.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> automatically sets the Seen attribute of a component to no whenever<br />

• The value of a status or numeric attribute for the component changes.<br />

• You change an expected, alarm, or threshold value for the component.<br />

The action that occurs when you click the Seen attribute in a component table varies,<br />

depending on how the template for the component table was defined (see 5.2):<br />

• Seen (toggle)<br />

When you click the Seen attribute, it toggles from yes to no or from no to yes.<br />

• Seen (dialog)<br />

When you click the Seen attribute, <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window asking you to<br />

select the new value.<br />

• Seen (delete)<br />

When you click the Seen attribute, <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window asking you to<br />

select the new value. If you select yes and your user class permits you to delete<br />

components, <strong>Status</strong> displays another dialog window asking whether the component<br />

should be deleted. If you click yes, <strong>Status</strong> deletes the component from its data<br />

model. (If your user class does not permit you to delete components, <strong>Status</strong> does<br />

not ask whether the component should be deleted.)<br />

Certain attribute values can cause <strong>Status</strong> to raise an alarm in Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Console. The value of the Seen attribute in <strong>Status</strong> does not affect these alarms. If a<br />

component that caused an alarm to be raised has its Seen attribute set to yes, the alarm<br />

remains raised.<br />

This attribute indicates whether any operator notes are associated with this component.<br />

The Notes attribute can have the value yes or no. <strong>Status</strong> automatically sets the value<br />

based on whether a notes file exists for the component.<br />

7833 4778–008 4–7


Attributes That Apply to All Component Classes<br />

Click the Notes attribute to display an edit window containing the note text (if any)<br />

associated with the component. While the Notes edit window is open, the value of the<br />

Notes attribute changes to “-“ (unknown) to remind you that the notes file for that<br />

component is being edited. If your user class allows it, you can make changes to the<br />

note text in the edit window.<br />

Follow these guidelines when working with note text:<br />

• When you enter text, an insertion point (a flashing vertical bar) indicates where the<br />

text appears.<br />

• Use the arrow keys to move the insertion point. Press Enter to move the insertion<br />

point to the next line.<br />

• Press Delete to delete text.<br />

• You can copy text from any open window on your screen using Ctrl-C, move the<br />

mouse pointer to the desired location in the edit window, click to move the insertion<br />

point to that location, and press Ctrl-V to paste the selected text in the edit window.<br />

When you close the edit window, you can save the changes you made, discard the<br />

changes, or delete the notes file if your user class allows you to perform these actions.<br />

4.2.7. Message<br />

This reported string attribute contains the latest message string received by Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> for this component in an event report.<br />

Note: Not every event report need specify a value for this attribute. Therefore, the<br />

Message attribute does not necessarily reflect the latest event report received for the<br />

component.<br />

In component tables and the attribute list, the Message attribute may be truncated.<br />

When you click the attribute, <strong>Status</strong> displays a window containing the entire message.<br />

4.2.8. Event Report Time<br />

This reported string attribute gives the latest time associated with an event report<br />

received for the component by Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>. This time reflects a time<br />

value reported by the sender of the event report, not the time the event report is<br />

received by <strong>Status</strong>. When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

Note: Not every event report need specify a value for this attribute. Therefore, the<br />

Event Report Time attribute does not necessarily reflect the time of the latest event<br />

report received for the component.<br />

The name of the attribute associated with Event Report Time is TIME. The value of this<br />

attribute is free format since <strong>Status</strong> displays the time, but does not use the time for<br />

calculations.<br />

4–8 7833 4778–008


4.2.9. Event Received<br />

Attributes That Apply to All Component Classes<br />

This reported attribute indicates whether at least one event report was received for the<br />

component since you selected the current configuration and classification. The Event<br />

Received attribute can have the value yes or no. Components for which no event report<br />

were received may not actually exist, or the mechanism that reports on these<br />

components possibly might not have been initiated or might be faulty. The value of this<br />

attribute controls whether the component is included in the Unreported Components<br />

table. (See 3.4.) When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

4.2.10. <strong>User</strong> Defined<br />

This specified attribute indicates whether the component was defined by some action<br />

you took. The <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute can have the value yes or no. A value of yes<br />

indicates either that you defined the component explicitly (see 6.1), or that the<br />

component was included in a component set you retrieved earlier. (See 2.4 and 6.4.)<br />

When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

4.2.11. Groups<br />

This list attribute contains the name of each component group to which the component<br />

belongs. When a component is created, <strong>Status</strong> automatically determines the groups to<br />

which the component belongs based on the membership criteria specified for each<br />

group. For further information, see 5.1.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> displays the names of as many component groups as can fit on the line. Click the<br />

attribute to display a window containing the entire list.<br />

4.2.12. Component Scope<br />

This attribute indicates whether the scope of the component is limited to a single host or<br />

includes all hosts monitored by <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

This table explains the possible values of the Component Scope attribute.<br />

Value Meaning<br />

Host The scope of the component is limited to a single host. Two<br />

components with the same name and class on different hosts refer<br />

to different actual components. For example, components<br />

representing OS 2200 runs or UNIX processes always have a scope<br />

of Host.<br />

Shared The scope of the component includes all hosts monitored by<br />

<strong>Status</strong>. Two logical components with the same name and class and<br />

with a scope of Shared model the same actual component. For<br />

example, specify a scope of Shared for disks that are shared across<br />

multiple systems.<br />

7833 4778–008 4–9


Attributes That Apply to All Component Classes<br />

4.2.13. Identical Components<br />

This attribute identifies all other components monitored by <strong>Status</strong> that model the same<br />

actual component. <strong>Status</strong> automatically determines the value of this attribute based on<br />

the component’s name, host, class, and scope.<br />

A value of Unknown indicates that no other monitored component models the same<br />

actual component. The value can be other than Unknown only if the scope of the<br />

component is Shared.<br />

Click this attribute to display the Identical Components table for the component. This<br />

table contains a row for each component that refers to the same actual component.<br />

However, if the value is Unknown, a message appears instead, indicating that this<br />

component is not identical to any other component.<br />

4–10 7833 4778–008


4.3. Site-Defined Attributes<br />

4.3.1. Site-Defined <strong>Status</strong> Attributes<br />

Site-Defined Attributes<br />

The Single Point Operation administrator can define up to eight site-defined status<br />

attributes along with associated expected status and alarm status attributes for each<br />

component class. The Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator specifies each attribute<br />

name, which is class specific.<br />

This table describes how <strong>Status</strong> displays these attributes in component tables and<br />

attribute lists.<br />

When <strong>Status</strong> displays...<br />

Then the column header or attribute<br />

label is...<br />

A site-defined status attribute The site-defined attribute name<br />

The expected status attribute<br />

associated with a site-defined status<br />

attribute<br />

The alarm status attribute associated<br />

with a site-defined status attribute<br />

The site-defined attribute name preceded by<br />

the word Expected<br />

The site-defined attribute name preceded by<br />

the word Alarm<br />

When the value of a status attribute for a component is not an expected value<br />

• The value and its background are displayed in alternate colors (yellow for an attention<br />

value, red for an alarm value) in component tables and attribute lists.<br />

• The value of the Exceptions attribute for the component increases by one.<br />

• The icons of any groups containing the component are displayed in yellow or red,<br />

unless you have set the Seen attribute for the component to yes.<br />

If the unexpected value is an alarm value, <strong>Status</strong> can be configured to raise an alarm in<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. This occurs only if the component class has alarm text<br />

specified and an alarm-id has been specified for the attribute. Depending on the alarm-id<br />

specified for the attribute, an alarm raised by <strong>Status</strong> can trigger external actions defined<br />

in the active alarm policy. For further information, see 7.3 and 7.5.<br />

Expected Values<br />

This specified attribute contains a list of all expected values for the corresponding status<br />

attribute. In a component table, the values are listed one per line.<br />

If your user class allows it, you can change the expected values of any component. Click<br />

the Expected attribute to display the current list of expected values and a menu of all<br />

possible values for the attribute, except those previously selected as alarm values. The<br />

list may include a hyphen (-) to indicate an unreported value. Unreported values, like<br />

reported values, can be treated as normal, attention, or alarm.<br />

7833 4778–008 4–11


Site-Defined Attributes<br />

Alarm Values<br />

You can select any values from this menu to form a new list of expected values. Click<br />

Cancel to leave the list of expected values unchanged. Click Unknown to remove all<br />

expected values. If you click Unknown, the next nonalarm value received by Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> for the attribute becomes its only expected value.<br />

This specified attribute contains a list of all alarm values for the corresponding status<br />

attribute. In a component table, the values are listed one per line.<br />

An alarm value causes the icons of any groups containing the component to appear in<br />

red in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram and subgroup window. It may also cause <strong>Status</strong> to raise an<br />

alarm in Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. This occurs only if the component class had<br />

alarm text specified and an alarm-id was specified for the attribute when the<br />

classification was defined. The severity of the alarm is taken from the component class<br />

definition. Depending on the alarm-id specified for the attribute, the alarm can trigger<br />

external actions defined in the active alarm policy. For further information, see 7.3 and<br />

7.5.<br />

If your user class allows it, you can change the alarm values of any component. Click the<br />

Alarm attribute to display the current list of alarm values and a menu of all possible<br />

values for the attribute, except those previously selected as expected values. The list<br />

may include a hyphen (-) to indicate an unreported value. Unreported values, like reported<br />

values, can be treated as normal, attention, or alarm.<br />

You can select any values from this menu to form a new list of alarm values. Click<br />

Cancel to leave the list of alarm values unchanged. Click Unknown to specify that no<br />

values indicate an alarm condition for that attribute.<br />

4.3.2. Site-Defined Numeric Attributes<br />

The Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator can define up to eight site-defined numeric<br />

attributes along with the two pairs of associated threshold attributes for each component<br />

class. The Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator specifies the attribute names, which are<br />

class specific.<br />

This table describes how <strong>Status</strong> displays these attributes in component tables and<br />

attribute lists.<br />

When <strong>Status</strong> displays... Then the column header or attribute label is...<br />

A site-defined numeric attribute The site-defined attribute name.<br />

A site-defined threshold attribute The site-defined attribute name preceded by the<br />

appropriate one of the following: Min Attn, Max Attn,<br />

Min Alarm, or Max Alarm.<br />

When a numeric attribute for a component attains an integer value outside the attention<br />

threshold range<br />

4–12 7833 4778–008


Site-Defined Attributes<br />

• The value and its background appear in alternate colors (yellow for an attention value,<br />

red for an alarm value) in component tables and attribute lists.<br />

• The value of the Exceptions attribute for the component increases by one.<br />

• The icons of any groups containing the component are displayed in yellow or red,<br />

unless you have set the Seen attribute for the component to yes.<br />

If the value is also outside the alarm threshold range, the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

administrator can configure <strong>Status</strong> to raise an alarm in Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console.<br />

This occurs only if the component class has alarm text specified and an alarm-id has<br />

been specified for the attribute. The severity of the alarm is taken from the component<br />

class definition. Depending on the alarm-id specified for the attribute, an alarm raised by<br />

<strong>Status</strong> can trigger external actions defined in the active alarm policy. For further<br />

information, see 7.3 and 7.5.<br />

If your user class allows it, you can change threshold values. When you click the<br />

numeric attribute itself, no action occurs. However, when you click an associated<br />

threshold attribute, <strong>Status</strong> displays the current threshold value and lets you remove or<br />

replace it. You can leave any or all threshold values unspecified, in which case they do<br />

not apply to the corresponding numeric attribute.<br />

Normally, a numeric attribute has an integer value. However, before any event report<br />

sets its value, its value is unknown. This is indicated by a hyphen (-) in component<br />

tables. As described in 7.5, the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator can configure<br />

<strong>Status</strong> to treat an unknown value as an expected, attention, or alarm value.<br />

4.3.3. Site-Defined String Attributes<br />

The Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator can define up to eight site-defined string<br />

attributes for each component class. The Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator specifies<br />

the attribute names, which are class specific. When Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

displays a site-defined string attribute in a component table or attribute list, the column<br />

header or attribute label is the site-defined attribute name.<br />

Your site administrator can associate a site-defined string attribute for a particular<br />

component class with a status or numeric attribute defined for that class. In this case,<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> displays the string attribute with the same color-coding as<br />

the associated attribute. For further information, see 7.5.<br />

When you click a site-defined string attribute, no action occurs.<br />

7833 4778–008 4–13


Attributes Specific to the OS 2200 Host Component Class [OS 2200]<br />

4.4. Attributes Specific to the OS 2200 Host<br />

Component Class [OS 2200]<br />

Each classification can contain one component class that models OS 2200 host systems.<br />

This class has OS_2200 specified as its Internal Class. (See 7.3.) In <strong>Status</strong>, this class<br />

contains one component for each OS 2200 host system in the current configuration.<br />

Components in this class must have a status attribute named “<strong>Status</strong>.“ In addition, these<br />

components have the special attributes described in the subsections that follow. These<br />

special attributes are displayed only in the attribute lists of these components; you<br />

cannot include them in component tables.<br />

4.4.1. Exec Level<br />

This reported string attribute identifies the current Exec level for the host, as reported by<br />

the data collector running on the host. When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

4.4.2. Site-Id<br />

This reported string attribute identifies the site-id for the host, as reported by the data<br />

collector running on the host. Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> compares this string to the<br />

site-id of the host specified in the current configuration. If they do not match, Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

• Displays the attribute value in the alarm color (red) in the attribute list for this<br />

component.<br />

• Displays the icon of any group containing this component in the alarm color.<br />

• Increases the value of the Exceptions attribute for the component by one.<br />

• Raises an alarm of major severity in Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console if it is thus<br />

configured. This occurs only if the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator specified<br />

alarm text for the component class when the classification was defined. The alarm-id<br />

is the component class name followed by ”.SiteId.” For further information, see 7.3.<br />

When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

4.4.3. Data Collection<br />

This reported status attribute indicates the status of data collection for the host. Data<br />

collection is a function provided by the OMKEY background run, which is released as part<br />

of SMART, included with the Integrated Operating Environment (IOE). The OMKEY<br />

background run must be installed and running on the OS 2200 host. For further<br />

information, see 2.1.<br />

For OS2000 systems, the Data Collection attribute can have one of the following values:<br />

• not_started<br />

• ready<br />

• keyin_unacknowledged<br />

4–14 7833 4778–008


Attributes Specific to the OS 2200 Host Component Class [OS 2200]<br />

• initiated<br />

• in_progress<br />

• completed<br />

• errored<br />

• OMKEY_not_running<br />

When the value of the <strong>Status</strong> attribute for the host is up, the only expected value of the<br />

Data Collection attribute is completed. Any other value is treated as an unexpected<br />

value.<br />

When the value of Data Collection is other than completed, errored, or<br />

OMKEY_not_running<br />

• The attribute appears in the attention color (yellow) in the attribute list for this<br />

component.<br />

• The icon of any component group containing the host component appears in the<br />

attention color (yellow).<br />

OMKEY_not_running and errored are unexpected alarm values and appear in the alarm<br />

color (red) in displays. Start the OMKEY background run on the OS 2200 host to resolve<br />

the OMKEY_not_running condition. The value errored represents an internal error<br />

condition.<br />

If the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator specified alarm text for the component class,<br />

these two values cause <strong>Status</strong> to raise an alarm in Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. The<br />

alarm-id is the component class name followed by ”.DataCollection”. For further<br />

information, see 7.3.<br />

When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

4.4.4. Connected Consoles<br />

This list attribute identifies all consoles through which Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> is<br />

connected to this host. Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> displays as many console names<br />

as can fit on the line. Clicking this attribute produces no action.<br />

4.4.5. System Type<br />

This string attribute identifies the system type (for example, IX-2200) for the host, as<br />

reported by the data collector running on the host. Clicking this attribute produces no<br />

action.<br />

7833 4778–008 4–15


Attributes Specific to the OS 2200 Host Component Class [OS 2200]<br />

4.4.6. Application Initialization<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> automatically sends an initialization command (console<br />

keyin) to the OMKEY data collector on the host when all of the following conditions are<br />

true:<br />

• Value of <strong>Status</strong> for the OS 2200 host is up.<br />

• The host is connected to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server through at least one<br />

system console, and that console is sending continuous display messages to the<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server.<br />

• The Data Collection attribute has the value not_started or ready.<br />

• There is at least one component class in the classification with System<br />

Types = OS2200 and for which an initialization mnemonic was specified. (See 7.3.)<br />

4–16 7833 4778–008


Attributes Specific to the OS 2200 Console Component Class [OS 2200]<br />

4.5. Attributes Specific to the OS 2200 Console<br />

Component Class [OS 2200]<br />

Each classification can contain one component class that models OS 2200 consoles.<br />

This class has CONSOLE specified as its Internal Class. (See 7.3.) In <strong>Status</strong>, this class<br />

contains one component for each OS 2200 console in the current configuration.<br />

Components in this class must have a status attribute named “<strong>Status</strong>.” In addition,<br />

these components have the special attributes described in the subsections that follow.<br />

These special attributes are displayed only in the attribute lists of these components; you<br />

cannot include them in component tables.<br />

4.5.1. Monitor<br />

This attribute indicates whether Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> should monitor the<br />

console. Possible values are yes and no.<br />

If you started Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, the<br />

value of the Monitor attribute reflects the value of the corresponding attribute in the<br />

Connection <strong>Status</strong> table of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. In this case, when you click<br />

a Monitor attribute value in <strong>Status</strong>, no action occurs. When you change the value in the<br />

Connection <strong>Status</strong> table, the value of the Monitor attribute in <strong>Status</strong> automatically<br />

changes.<br />

If you started <strong>Status</strong> independently of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console and your user<br />

class allows it, click a Monitor attribute value to toggle it between yes and no.<br />

4.5.2. Connected to Application<br />

This reported attribute indicates whether the console is correctly connected to Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>. The attribute has the value yes or no. When you click this<br />

attribute, no action occurs.<br />

4.5.3. Connected to Host<br />

This status attribute identifies the current status of the connection between the console<br />

and its host. The attribute value can be yes or no. When the value of the <strong>Status</strong><br />

attribute for the console is active, the expected value of this attribute is yes. If the value<br />

is no, Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> displays the following information in the attention<br />

color (yellow) to draw your attention:<br />

• The attribute value in the attribute list for this component<br />

• The icon of any component group containing the component<br />

When the <strong>Status</strong> value for the console is not active, Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> does<br />

not compare the value of this attribute to any expected value.<br />

When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

7833 4778–008 4–17


Attributes Specific to the OS 2200 Console Component Class [OS 2200]<br />

4.5.4. Connected Host<br />

This status attribute identifies the host that is currently connected to the console, as<br />

reported by the data collector running on the host.<br />

If the value of this attribute does not match the name of the connected host as specified<br />

in the current configuration, the attribute appears in the alarm color (red).<br />

If alarm text was specified for the component class, this condition causes an alarm to be<br />

raised in Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. The alarm-id is the component class name<br />

followed by ”.ConnectedHost”. For further information, see 7.3.<br />

When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

4–18 7833 4778–008


Attributes Specific to the MCP Host Class [MCP]<br />

4.6. Attributes Specific to the MCP Host Class<br />

[MCP]<br />

Each classification can contain one component class that models MCP host systems.<br />

This class has MCP specified as its Internal Class. (See 7.3.) In <strong>Status</strong>, this class<br />

contains one component for each MCP host system in the current configuration.<br />

Components in this class must have a status attribute named “<strong>Status</strong>.” In addition,<br />

these components have the special attributes described in the subsections that follow.<br />

These special attributes are displayed only in the attribute lists of these components; you<br />

cannot include them in component tables.<br />

4.6.1. Monitor<br />

This attribute indicates whether Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> should monitor the MCP<br />

host. Possible values are yes and no.<br />

If you started <strong>Status</strong> from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, the value of the Monitor<br />

attribute reflects the value of the corresponding attribute in the Connection <strong>Status</strong> table<br />

of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. In this case, when you click the Monitor attribute in<br />

<strong>Status</strong>, no action occurs. When you change the value in the Connection <strong>Status</strong> table, the<br />

value of the Monitor attribute in <strong>Status</strong> automatically changes.<br />

If you started <strong>Status</strong> independently of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console and your user<br />

class allows it, click a Monitor attribute value to toggle it between yes and no.<br />

4.6.2. Connected to Application<br />

This reported attribute indicates whether the host is connected to <strong>Status</strong>. The attribute<br />

has the value yes or no. When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

4.6.3. Data Collection<br />

This reported status attribute indicates the status of data collection for the host. Data<br />

collection is a function provided by the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface for ClearPath<br />

MCP (MCP agent), which runs on the MCP host. For more information, see 2.1 and the<br />

MCP Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface Software Installation and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

For MCP systems, the Data Collection attribute can have one of the following values:<br />

• not_started<br />

• initiated<br />

• in_progress<br />

• completed<br />

• errored<br />

When the value of the <strong>Status</strong> attribute for the host is active, any value of the Data<br />

Collection attribute except completed is treated as an unexpected value.<br />

7833 4778–008 4–19


Attributes Specific to the MCP Host Class [MCP]<br />

When the value is other than completed or errored<br />

• The attribute appears in the attention color (yellow) in the attribute list for this<br />

component.<br />

• The icon of any component group containing the host component appears in the<br />

attention color (yellow).<br />

The value errored is an unexpected alarm value and appears in the alarm color (red) in<br />

displays. This value indicates that <strong>Status</strong> was unable to send the initiate command to the<br />

host, or that a message returned by the MCP host agent indicated a serious problem.<br />

If alarm text was specified for the component class, the value errored raises an alarm in<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. The alarm-id is the component class name followed by<br />

”.DataCollection”. For further information, see 7.3.<br />

When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

Note: When a classification requires initialization information about application<br />

components, the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface for ClearPath MCP software sends<br />

the INITIALIZE END message to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server before it sends the<br />

messages for each of the application components. This means that the value of the Data<br />

Collection attribute is set to completed before data collection is complete for the<br />

application components. This happens because the messages for the application<br />

components are sent asynchronously.<br />

4.6.4. Host Agent Active<br />

This reported attribute indicates whether the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface for<br />

ClearPath MCP has sent at least one message to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server.<br />

The attribute has the value yes or no. When the value of the <strong>Status</strong> attribute for the host<br />

is active, the expected value of this attribute is yes. If the value of this attribute is no,<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> displays the following information in the attention color<br />

(yellow) to draw your attention:<br />

• The attribute value in the attribute list for this component<br />

• The icon of any component group containing the component<br />

When the <strong>Status</strong> value for the host is not active, Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> does not<br />

compare the value of this attribute to any expected value.<br />

When you click this attribute, no action occurs.<br />

4.6.5. Application Initialization<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> automatically sends an initialization request to the MCP<br />

agent when all of the following conditions are true:<br />

• Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> is connected to the MCP host being monitored.<br />

• The value of the <strong>Status</strong> attribute for the MCP host is either active or timeout.<br />

4–20 7833 4778–008


Attributes Specific to the MCP Host Class [MCP]<br />

• The Data Collection attribute has the value not_started.<br />

• The Host Agent Active attribute has the value yes.<br />

• There is at least one component class in the classification with System Types = MCP<br />

and for which the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator specified an initialization<br />

mnemonic. (See 7.3.)<br />

7833 4778–008 4–21


Attributes Specific UNIX Host Class [UNIX]<br />

4.7. Attributes Specific UNIX Host Class [UNIX]<br />

Each classification can contain one component class that models UNIX and other<br />

ANSI X3.64 systems. This class has ANSI_X3_64 specified as its Internal Class.<br />

(See 7.3.) In <strong>Status</strong>, this class contains one component for each UNIX and other<br />

ANSI X3.64 host in the current configuration. Components in this class must have a<br />

status attribute named “<strong>Status</strong>.” In addition, these components have the special<br />

attributes described in the subsections that follow. These special attributes are<br />

displayed only in the attribute lists of these components; you cannot include them in<br />

component tables.<br />

4.7.1. Monitor<br />

This attribute indicates whether Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> should monitor the<br />

ANSI X3.64 (UNIX) host. Possible values are yes and no.<br />

If you started <strong>Status</strong> from Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console, the value of the Monitor<br />

attribute reflects the value of the corresponding attribute in the Connection <strong>Status</strong> table<br />

of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. In this case, when you click the Monitor attribute in<br />

<strong>Status</strong>, no action occurs. When you change the value in the Connection <strong>Status</strong> table, the<br />

value of the Monitor attribute in <strong>Status</strong> automatically changes.<br />

If you started <strong>Status</strong> independently of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console and your user<br />

class allows it, click a Monitor attribute value to toggle it between yes and no.<br />

4.7.2. Connected to Application<br />

This reported attribute indicates whether the host is connected to Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>. The attribute has the value yes or no. When you click this attribute<br />

value, no action occurs.<br />

4–22 7833 4778–008


Section 5<br />

Diagram Definitions<br />

A diagram definition includes<br />

• The definition of each component group displayed in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram and in each<br />

subgroup window<br />

• The template for each component table that you can display<br />

You can change these definitions, unless your user class restricts you from doing so.<br />

When you develop a combination of definitions that you want to reuse, you can save it as<br />

a named diagram definition.<br />

This section explains how to<br />

• Define component groups and subgroups<br />

• Define component table templates<br />

• Save a diagram definition<br />

• Delete a diagram definition<br />

• Change the diagram definition you are currently using<br />

7833 4778–008 5–1


Defining Component Groups<br />

5.1. Defining Component Groups<br />

You can change the component groups included in the current diagram definition. To<br />

start this process<br />

1. Click Diagrams in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the Diagrams menu.<br />

2. Click Define Component Groups. <strong>Status</strong> displays the Define <strong>Status</strong> Diagram Groups<br />

table. It also changes the actions that occur when you click icons in the <strong>Status</strong><br />

diagram.<br />

If your diagram definition contains group windows in addition to the <strong>Status</strong> diagram,<br />

<strong>Status</strong> also opens a Define Groups table for each group window that is open when<br />

you start group definition. The titles of these Define Groups tables include the name<br />

of the parent group. It is recommended that you start group definition with only the<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Diagram open, and then open subgroup windows later as needed.<br />

5.1.1. Define Groups Tables<br />

The Define <strong>Status</strong> Diagram Groups table in the following illustration has one row for each<br />

highest-level component group currently defined. The other Define Groups tables have<br />

one row for each subgroup currently defined in the parent group. Each Define Groups<br />

table has a column for each attribute of component groups that you can change. You can<br />

click any value in these tables to change it. The column heading of each column appears<br />

in bold since you can change values in every column.<br />

Figure 5–1. Define <strong>Status</strong> Diagram Groups Table<br />

Click Help to display the Help menu. You can use this menu to display information about<br />

this table, including information on individual columns.<br />

5–2 7833 4778–008


5.1.2. Capabilities<br />

Defining Component Groups<br />

The Define Groups tables let you make the following changes to component groups:<br />

• Change the name of a group (see 5.1.3.)<br />

• Change the label displayed with a group icon (see 5.1.4.)<br />

• Change the placement of a label in relation to its group icon (see 5.1.4.)<br />

• Change the icon representing a component group (see 5.1.5.)<br />

• Change the location of a group icon (see 5.1.6.)<br />

• Specify the components to be included in a group (see 5.1.8.)<br />

• Define subgroups for a component group (see 5.1.9.)<br />

• Change the Component Group table template associated with a component group<br />

(see 5.1.7.)<br />

• Add or copy new component groups (see 5.1.10. and 5.1.11.)<br />

• Delete existing component groups (see 5.1.12.)<br />

• Add, delete, or move default component groups (see 5.1.13 through 5.1.17.)<br />

• Change the background of a group window (see 5.1.18.)<br />

• Change the color of labels in a group window (see 5.1.19)<br />

• Change the title of a group window (see 5.1.20.)<br />

5.1.3. Changing a Group Name<br />

To change the name of a component group, click its name in the Group Name column of<br />

the Define Groups table that contains the group, and enter the new name in the dialog<br />

window. If the label and name of the group are the same, the label changes also.<br />

5.1.4. Changing a Group Label<br />

To change the label displayed with a component group icon in a group window<br />

1. Click the value in the Label column. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window that asks you to<br />

enter the new label.<br />

2. Enter the new label. Click the Editor button if you want the label to appear on<br />

multiple lines and press Enter at the end of each line.<br />

To change the placement of the label in relation to its group icon in a group window, click<br />

the value in the Label Position column to toggle among the four values: north, east,<br />

south, and west.<br />

7833 4778–008 5–3


Defining Component Groups<br />

5.1.5. Selecting Icons<br />

In the <strong>Status</strong> diagram and subgroup windows, <strong>Status</strong> can display icons of two types:<br />

• Bitmap icons are single-color icons. This color changes to represent the various<br />

states the icon can represent: normal (green), attention (yellow), alarm (red), and<br />

empty (off-white). For all states, the icon has the same size and shape. Internally, a<br />

bitmap icon is defined by a single file using the xbm format.<br />

• Pixmap icons are multicolored icons. The size, shape, and color of these icons can<br />

change for each of the states the icon can represent: normal, attention, alarm, and<br />

empty. Internally, a pixmap icon is defined by a family of four icon files, one for each<br />

state. The format of pixmap icons can be bmp, jpeg, pbm, pgm, png, pnm, ppm, tiff,<br />

or xpm. All icons in one family must be of the same format.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> is supplied with a large number of pixmap icon families. This includes two<br />

pixmap families for each component class in every classification supplied with<br />

<strong>Status</strong>. These pixmaps are two different sizes, one large and one small. The<br />

pixmaps whose names end with _lg are the larger icons. The pixmaps whose names<br />

end with _sm are the smaller icons. You can choose large or small icons for a group<br />

window, depending on how many icons you want in the window and how far away<br />

you want them to be visible.<br />

The icon families supplied with <strong>Status</strong> use the following scheme to depict the various<br />

states the icons represent:<br />

• Normal=green circle<br />

• Attention=yellow triangle<br />

• Alarm=red octagon<br />

• Empty=blue square<br />

For further information on the icon pixmaps supplied with <strong>Status</strong>, see Appendix F.<br />

For further information on icon file types and defining icon families, see the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

To select the icon family representing a component group in a group window<br />

1. Click the value in the Icon column of the component group you want to change.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window listing all complete icon families available for <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

2. Select an icon from the dialog window. Select Cancel if you decide not to replace the<br />

icon.<br />

After you make your selection, the icon of the new family replaces the previous icon<br />

in the group window.<br />

To display all icons in an icon family<br />

1. Click Edit in the Define Group menu bar.<br />

2. Click Display Icon Family.<br />

3. Double-click the name of the icon family you want displayed.<br />

5–4 7833 4778–008


Defining Component Groups<br />

A window appears showing the four icons in the icon family depicting the normal,<br />

attention, alarm, and empty states used by <strong>Status</strong>:<br />

• If the icons are bitmaps, they all have the same size and shape but different colors.<br />

• If the icons are pixmaps, their size, shape, and color depend on the individual icon<br />

files contained in the family.<br />

In Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Level 7.4, the icons supplied with <strong>Status</strong> changed from singlecolor<br />

bitmap icons to multicolor, three-dimensional pixmap icons. Existing diagrams can<br />

continue to use the bitmap icons, or you can update the icons.<br />

To update all obsolete bitmap icons in a diagram<br />

1. Select Edit in the Define Group menu bar.<br />

2. Select Upgrade Obsolete Icons.<br />

3. Click Yes to upgrade all obsolete icons in all component groups in the diagram.<br />

Note: The Upgrade Obsolete Icons menu entry is disabled if the diagram does not use<br />

any obsolete bitmap icons.<br />

5.1.6. Positioning Icons<br />

Each group window has an attribute named “grid increment,” which helps you position<br />

icons quickly and neatly. Each group window is viewed as a grid 1000 units high by 1000<br />

units wide; the default grid increment is 20. When you position an icon with the mouse<br />

pointer, the coordinates of the icon are automatically rounded to the nearest multiple of<br />

the grid increment. Use a smaller increment for a window with many icons; use a larger<br />

grid increment for a window with few icons.<br />

To change the grid increment for a group window<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define Groups table corresponding to the group<br />

window. <strong>Status</strong> displays a pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Change Grid Increment. <strong>Status</strong> opens a dialog window and asks for the new<br />

grid increment.<br />

3. Enter an integer from 1 to 500. <strong>Status</strong> stores this value in the diagram definition.<br />

The new grid increment affects icons that you subsequently move and create, but it does<br />

not affect the positions of existing icons.<br />

To position automatically all existing icons in a group window to conform to the new grid<br />

increment<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define Groups table corresponding to the group<br />

window. <strong>Status</strong> displays a pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Snap to Grid. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window and asks whether you want to<br />

continue or cancel the task.<br />

7833 4778–008 5–5


Defining Component Groups<br />

3. Click Continue. <strong>Status</strong> rounds the coordinates of each existing icon in the group<br />

window to the nearest multiple of the grid increment.<br />

There are two ways to change the location of a particular icon in a group window:<br />

• In the group window itself<br />

− Click the icon to be moved.<br />

− Click the new location for the icon. The new location must be in any empty part<br />

of the same group window; that is, it must not be within the borders of any icon,<br />

including the icon being moved. The icon moves to the new location, rounded to<br />

the nearest multiple of the grid increment for that window. The X coordinate and<br />

Y coordinate attributes in the corresponding Define Groups table change to<br />

reflect the new location of the icon.<br />

• In the Define Groups table corresponding to the group window<br />

− Click the value in the X Coord column to change the horizontal position of the<br />

icon. <strong>Status</strong> opens a dialog window and asks you to enter the new horizontal<br />

position (which refers to the center of the icon). Enter a value from 0 to 1000.<br />

− Click the value in the Y Coord column to change the vertical position of the icon.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> opens a dialog window and asks you to enter the new vertical position<br />

(which refers to the center of the icon). Enter a value from 0 to 1000.<br />

Both the horizontal and vertical scales run from 0 to 1000 (from left to right and<br />

from top to bottom). When either value is changed, the icon automatically<br />

moves to the new position. When you position an icon using this method, the<br />

coordinates are not automatically rounded to the nearest multiple of the grid<br />

increment.<br />

5.1.7. Changing the Component Group Table Template<br />

The Component Group table template determines which attribute columns appear when<br />

you click the group icon in its group window. To change the Component Group table<br />

template associated with a component group<br />

1. Click the value in the Component Group Table Template column of the component<br />

group you want to change. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window listing the names of all<br />

Component Group table templates.<br />

2. Select one or more Component Group table templates that you want to be<br />

associated with this component group. If you select more than one template, you<br />

are prompted to choose one of them when you click the group icon to display a<br />

component table.<br />

Note: Select Unknown if you want no Component Group table template to be<br />

associated with the component group. If you select Unknown, <strong>Status</strong> displays the<br />

attribute list of a component selected from the group instead of a component table.<br />

To define new Component Group table templates, or to change existing templates,<br />

follow the instructions in 5.2.<br />

5–6 7833 4778–008


Defining Component Groups<br />

5.1.8. Specifying Components to Be Included in a Group<br />

To specify components to be included in a component group, you set values for three<br />

attributes of the component group. This table describes these attributes.<br />

Attribute Description<br />

Hosts List of hosts whose components are to be included in the<br />

group.<br />

Classes List of classes of components to be included in the group.<br />

Component Names List of names of components to be included in the group.<br />

Any component that has one of the names you specify and belongs to a host and class<br />

you select is a member of the component group.<br />

To specify components to be included in a component group set the values of the Hosts,<br />

Classes, and Component Names attributes as follows:<br />

1. Click the Hosts, Classes, or Component Names entry you want to set. <strong>Status</strong> opens<br />

a window and asks you to select or enter the values you want.<br />

2. Select or enter the values, and click OK. You can enter multiple values for each of<br />

these entries. Select the value Unknown if you want to include components in the<br />

group regardless of their hosts, classes, or component names.<br />

When entering a component name, use wildcards if you want to include components<br />

based on only a portion of the component name. A question mark (?) in the component<br />

name means that any character can occupy that position. For example, you can specify<br />

A?C to include components named AAC, ABC, ACC, and so forth.<br />

An asterisk (*) means that any number of characters (zero or more) can occupy that<br />

position in the component name. For example, you can specify A*C to include<br />

components named AC, ABC, AABC, AABBC, and so forth. Or, you can specify DK* to<br />

include components whose names start with DK.<br />

Example of Defining a Group of Tape Drives<br />

To define a component group that contains all tape drives for hosts RS01 and RS02<br />

1. Click the Hosts value for that component group. Select the values RS01 and RS02,<br />

and then click OK.<br />

2. Click the Classes value for the component group. Select Tape, and then click OK.<br />

3. If the value for Component Names is a hyphen (-), leave this value as is. Otherwise,<br />

click the value and select Unknown. This causes components to be included in the<br />

group regardless of their names.<br />

Example of Defining a Group of All /home File Systems<br />

To define a component group that contains all file systems (for all managed UNIX hosts)<br />

whose names begin with “/home”<br />

7833 4778–008 5–7


Defining Component Groups<br />

1. If the value for Hosts is a hyphen (-), leave this value as is. Otherwise, click the value<br />

and select Unknown.<br />

2. Click the Classes value for the component group. Select File System, and then click<br />

OK.<br />

3. Click the value for Component Names. Enter “/home*”, and then click OK. The<br />

asterisk indicates that any characters can follow the characters “/home”.<br />

Component Membership in Subgroups<br />

When you define groups in a group window other than the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, selection<br />

criteria from the parent group are carried down to each subgroup automatically. For<br />

example, if a parent group contains components only from a certain component class,<br />

then all subgroups of this parent group are limited to components of this class,<br />

regardless of what you specify for the Classes attribute of these subgroups.<br />

If you select membership criteria for a group using the Hosts and Classes columns, the<br />

hosts and classes from which you can select are limited to those to which the parent<br />

group is restricted. Specifying no hosts for a subgroup limits the subgroup to the same<br />

host systems as the parent group, and likewise for classes and component names.<br />

Any changes of membership criteria for a parent group are implicitly carried down to the<br />

parent group's subgroups, even though explicit changes are not made to the<br />

membership criteria of the subgroups. For example, if a parent group is limited to host<br />

systems S1, S2, and S3, its subgroups can individually be limited to S1, S2, or S3 (or any<br />

combination of these). However, if you later exclude S3 from the parent's class,<br />

components belonging to S3 will no longer be in any subgroup of that parent group even<br />

though these subgroups might still show S3 in the Hosts selection list (if they were thus<br />

defined previously).<br />

5.1.9. Defining Subgroups<br />

The Subgroups? column has the value yes or no for each component group, with no as<br />

the default. Click a value in this column to open a dialog window with Yes and No<br />

buttons and text explaining the column and indicating the column's current value:<br />

• Click Yes to open a subgroup window and a Define Groups table for the associated<br />

component group (if they are not already open). If the value was previously No, the<br />

window and table are empty.<br />

• Click No to close the associated subgroup window and Define Groups table (if they<br />

are open).<br />

If any subgroups were previously defined for the group, you are warned that these<br />

will be automatically deleted, and are asked to confirm or cancel.<br />

5–8 7833 4778–008


5.1.10. Adding New Component Groups<br />

To add new component groups individually to a group window<br />

Defining Component Groups<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the corresponding Define Groups table. <strong>Status</strong> displays<br />

a pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Add Groups. <strong>Status</strong> opens a dialog window and asks for the names of the<br />

groups to be added.<br />

3. Enter the names of the groups to be added and press Enter at the end of each<br />

name. Click OK.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> creates the new groups, supplies default values for all group attributes, and adds<br />

rows for these new groups at the bottom of the Define Groups table. The new icons<br />

appear in the bottom left of the group window; they may overlay existing icons. It is<br />

recommended that you move them immediately to the desired locations, as described in<br />

5.1.6. Specify the icon family, group membership, and other group attributes as<br />

described in the previous subsections.<br />

5.1.11. Copying a Component Group<br />

You can add new component groups by copying an existing component group with its<br />

defined set of attributes.<br />

To copy attributes from an existing component group<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define Groups table in which the group appears.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> displays a pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Copy Groups. <strong>Status</strong> opens a dialog window and asks you to select the group<br />

you want to copy.<br />

3. Double-click the name of the group you want to copy. <strong>Status</strong> opens a dialog window<br />

and asks for the names of the groups to be added.<br />

4. Enter the names of the groups to be added and press Enter after each name. Click<br />

OK.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> creates a new group for each name you enter, and adds rows for these new<br />

groups at the bottom of the Define Groups table. Except for location and label<br />

information, the new groups have the same group attribute values as the existing group<br />

you selected. The labels of the new groups are the same as their names. The new icons<br />

appear in the bottom left of the group window. It is recommended that you move them<br />

immediately to the desired locations.<br />

5.1.12. Deleting Existing Component Groups<br />

To delete existing component groups from a group window<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the corresponding Define Groups table. <strong>Status</strong> displays<br />

a pull-down menu.<br />

7833 4778–008 5–9


Defining Component Groups<br />

2. Click Delete Groups. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing all existing<br />

component groups in the group window.<br />

3. Double-click the desired component group to delete a single component group. Click<br />

once on each group name to select multiple component groups to be deleted, and<br />

then click OK.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> deletes the selected groups, removing their rows from the Define Groups table<br />

and their icons from the group window.<br />

5.1.13. Adding Default Groups for a Selected Host<br />

For each host in the current configuration, there is one default component group for each<br />

component class that is applicable to the host type. Default groups provide a quick and<br />

easy way for you to define component groups. The name of each default group is the<br />

host name, followed by a period, followed by the class name.<br />

Each default group is automatically associated with a Component Group table template<br />

appropriate for the component class. When you click the group icon, a table with the<br />

appropriate columns appears.<br />

To add default groups for a selected host<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the applicable Define Groups table. <strong>Status</strong> displays a<br />

pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Add Default Groups for Host. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing the<br />

name of each host in the current configuration. If you are defining default groups for<br />

a subgroup window, the dialog window contains only the names of hosts included in<br />

the parent group.<br />

3. Select a host from the list. <strong>Status</strong> asks for the vertical position where you want to<br />

place the icons for the default groups.<br />

4. Enter a number from 0 to 1000.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> then creates a default group for each component class that applies to the host<br />

you selected. If you are defining default groups for a subgroup window, subgroups are<br />

created only for the component classes included in the parent group. <strong>Status</strong> supplies<br />

default values for all group attributes. In particular<br />

• The Hosts attribute for every group is set to the host you selected.<br />

• The Classes attribute is set to each of the different classes for each of the different<br />

groups.<br />

• The Names attribute for every group is set to Unknown, meaning that components<br />

are included in the group regardless of their names.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> places the associated icons in a horizontal row at the vertical position you<br />

specified, and adds rows at the end of the Define Groups table for each group. After the<br />

default groups are created, you can change, move, or delete each individual group as<br />

desired.<br />

5–10 7833 4778–008


5.1.14. Deleting Default Groups for a Selected Host<br />

To delete default groups from a group window for a selected host<br />

Defining Component Groups<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the corresponding Define Groups table. <strong>Status</strong> displays<br />

a pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Delete Default Groups for Host. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing the<br />

name of each host in the current configuration or parent group.<br />

3. Select a host from the window.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> deletes each component group in the group window that is a default component<br />

group for the specified host. (A default group is one whose name consists of the host<br />

name followed by a period and a component class name.) There is no error if some or all<br />

default groups for the host were deleted earlier; <strong>Status</strong> deletes any remaining default<br />

groups.<br />

5.1.15. Moving Default Groups for a Selected Host<br />

To move default groups in a group window for a selected host<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the corresponding Define Groups table. <strong>Status</strong> displays<br />

a pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Move Default Groups for Host. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing the<br />

name of each host in the current configuration or parent group.<br />

3. Select a host from the window. <strong>Status</strong> asks for the vertical position where you want<br />

to place the icons for the default groups.<br />

4. Enter a number from 0 to 1000.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> moves each default group associated with the host to the specified vertical<br />

position; the horizontal position is unchanged. (A default group is one whose name<br />

consists of the host name followed by a period and a component class name.) There is<br />

no error if some or all default groups for the host were deleted earlier; <strong>Status</strong> moves any<br />

remaining default groups.<br />

5.1.16. Adding Default Groups for Each Host and Class<br />

You can easily create an entire status diagram that consists of default component groups<br />

for all meaningful combinations of hosts in the configuration and component classes in<br />

the classification. Similarly, you can create an entire subgroup window that consists of all<br />

meaningful combinations of host and classes in the parent group.<br />

To create such a group window<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define Groups table. <strong>Status</strong> displays a pull-down<br />

menu.<br />

2. Click Create Default Groups for All Hosts and Classes.<br />

7833 4778–008 5–11


Defining Component Groups<br />

<strong>Status</strong> immediately creates component groups in the group window for each<br />

combination of host and component class, arranged in evenly spaced rows and columns.<br />

After the groups are created, you can change, move, or delete them individually as<br />

desired.<br />

5.1.17. Adding Host-Independent Component Groups for All<br />

Component Classes<br />

You can easily create an entire group window of host-independent component groups for<br />

all component classes in the classification or parent group. In this case, each component<br />

group contains components from all hosts in the configuration or parent group.<br />

Each host-independent group is automatically associated with a Component Group table<br />

template appropriate for its component class. When you click the group icon, a table<br />

with the appropriate columns appears.<br />

To add default groups for all component classes<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define Groups table. <strong>Status</strong> displays a pull-down<br />

menu.<br />

2. Click Add Default Groups for All Classes. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window asking<br />

whether you want a lower level group window defined for each group it creates.<br />

3. Click No if you do not want <strong>Status</strong> to create subgroups for each group it creates.<br />

Click Yes if you want <strong>Status</strong> to create one subgroup for each host belonging to each<br />

group.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> creates one component group for each component class in the classification or<br />

parent group. Each group contains components from all hosts in the configuration or<br />

parent group. The icons for the component groups are arranged in one, two, or three<br />

rows in the group window, depending on the number of icons. <strong>Status</strong> also creates<br />

subgroups for each of these groups if you clicked Yes for this. After the groups are<br />

created, you can change, move or delete them individually as desired.<br />

5.1.18. Changing the Background<br />

The background of a window is the fixed graphic that is displayed in the window behind<br />

any icons displayed in the window.<br />

To change the background for a group window<br />

1. Select the Change Background item in the Edit menu of the corresponding Define<br />

Groups table.<br />

A dialog window appears showing the current choice and displaying a list of all<br />

possible choices.<br />

2. Either select Unknown to remove the background or select the name of a<br />

background. The background appears immediately in the corresponding group<br />

window.<br />

5–12 7833 4778–008


Defining Component Groups<br />

Background bitmaps and pixmaps are fixed in size. The background is tiled if it is smaller<br />

than the window; it is truncated if it is too large for the window. Further, whenever you<br />

resize a group window, the icons within the window are adjusted proportionately. The<br />

icons, therefore, move in relation to the background.<br />

Background files are located in the folder named backgrounds in the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> data folder on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. You can define additional<br />

background files using various graphical tools, and add them to this folder, where they<br />

will be automatically made available to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console and Single Pont<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

5.1.19. Changing the Label Color<br />

Depending on the background you select, you can change the label colors in clusters to<br />

provide greater visibility. To change the label color of a group window<br />

1. Select Change Label Color in the Edit menu of the corresponding Define Groups<br />

table.<br />

2. Select the name of the desired color. The label in the group window is displayed<br />

using the color selected.<br />

5.1.20. Changing the Title<br />

To change the title of a group window<br />

1. Select the Change Title item in the Edit menu of the corresponding Define Groups<br />

table.<br />

2. Enter a string of characters as the title for the group window. The new title with<br />

substitutions is displayed immediately in the title bar of the group window. The title<br />

is limited to a single line and can include the following substitution strings:<br />

\_LEVEL\ Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> release level<br />

\_CONFIGURATION\ Current configuration<br />

\_CLASSIFICATION\ Current classification<br />

\_USER\ Current user<br />

\_DIAGRAM\ Current diagram<br />

\_GROUP\ Name of the parent group of the window<br />

\_GROUPLABEL\ Label of the parent group of the window (with newlines<br />

converted to spaces)<br />

\_SERVER\ Name of the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server<br />

7833 4778–008 5–13


Defining Component Groups<br />

The default title string for the <strong>Status</strong> Diagram is<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>(Configuration: \_CONFIGURATION\ Classification: \_CLASSIFICATION\<br />

Diagram: \_DIAGRAM\)<br />

The default title string for each subgroup window is<br />

Group: \_GROUPLABEL\<br />

5–14 7833 4778–008


Defining Component Table Templates<br />

5.2. Defining Component Table Templates<br />

A component table template specifies the appearance, behavior, and attributes of a<br />

component table. It determines which attributes appear in a table when you open the<br />

table. As explained in 3.4, there are five types of component tables:<br />

• Component Group<br />

• Components with Unexpected Values<br />

• Components with Notes<br />

• Unreported Components<br />

• Identical Components<br />

You can specify how <strong>Status</strong> displays attributes in each of these tables. For example, you<br />

can change the screen size, display behavior, and attribute columns of any component<br />

table template defined in the current diagram definition.<br />

You can also change, add, and delete Component Group table templates. When a<br />

component group is displayed using a particular Component Group table template, <strong>Status</strong><br />

displays the component attributes as specified for that template.<br />

To start defining component table templates<br />

1. Click Diagrams in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the Diagrams menu.<br />

2. Click Define Component Tables. <strong>Status</strong> displays a table called Define Component<br />

Tables. This illustration shows the table.<br />

7833 4778–008 5–15


Defining Component Table Templates<br />

Figure 5–2. Table to Define Component Table Templates<br />

Click Help to display the Help menu for the window. You can use this menu to display<br />

general information about this table including information on individual columns.<br />

Capabilities<br />

The Define Component Tables table contains one row for each component table<br />

template in the diagram definition. These templates include:<br />

• unexpected_components<br />

This template controls the Components with Unexpected Values table.<br />

• noted_components<br />

This template controls the Components with Notes table.<br />

• unreported_components<br />

This template controls the Unreported Components table.<br />

• identical_components<br />

This template controls the Identical Components tables.<br />

5–16 7833 4778–008


Defining Component Table Templates<br />

• Miscellaneous predefined Component Group templates<br />

The names of these templates indicate which columns they include.<br />

• Component Group templates whose names match the component classes<br />

<strong>Status</strong> automatically creates one template for each class in the current classification.<br />

Each of these templates, by default, includes columns for the Name, Host,<br />

Exceptions, Seen, and Notes attributes, plus one column for each site-defined<br />

attribute in the associated class.<br />

The Define Component Tables table contains one column for each attribute of<br />

component table templates that you can change. The column headers of these columns<br />

appear in bold to indicate that you can change the values. You can click any value in this<br />

table to change it, except a value in the first column, which is the table template name.<br />

With the Define Component Tables table, you can make the following changes to<br />

component table templates:<br />

• Change the screen size of a table template.<br />

• Change the display behavior of a table template.<br />

• Change the component class associated with the table template.<br />

• Change the attribute columns in the component table template and the order in<br />

which they appear.<br />

You can use the Edit menu of the Define Component Tables table to perform the<br />

following operations on Component Group table templates:<br />

• Add new Component Group table templates<br />

• Delete existing Component Group table templates<br />

• Select a different Component Group table template as the default<br />

5.2.1. Changing the Screen Size of a Table Template<br />

To change the screen size of a component table template<br />

• Click the value labeled Width to change the displayed width of the table in pixels.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> opens a dialog window and asks you to enter the new value. Enter a value<br />

from 50 to 1280.<br />

• Click the value labeled Height to change the displayed height of the table in pixels.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> opens a dialog window and asks you to enter the new value. Enter a value<br />

from 50 to 1000.<br />

When you open a table using the template, if the displayed width or height of the table is<br />

less than its actual width or height, the table has scroll bars.<br />

The size you specify here determines the size of the table on your screen when you open<br />

it. You can change its size later by using the mouse.<br />

7833 4778–008 5–17


Defining Component Table Templates<br />

5.2.2. Changing the Display Behavior of a Table Template<br />

As explained in 3.4, <strong>Status</strong> can display a component table in two ways:<br />

• Static—the table contains a row for each component in the component group.<br />

• Dynamic—the table contains rows only for components with exceptions not marked<br />

as seen (those components with an attention or alarm value and with Seen=no).<br />

To specify the display behavior as dynamic or static, click a value in the column labeled<br />

Behavior. <strong>Status</strong> opens a dialog window and asks you to choose between static and<br />

dynamic behavior. If you click Unknown, then whenever you open a component group<br />

using this table template, <strong>Status</strong> asks whether you want static or dynamic behavior.<br />

Note: The Behavior attribute applies only to Component Group table templates. It does<br />

not affect the unexpected_components, noted_components, unreported_components, or<br />

identical_components table templates.<br />

5.2.3. Changing the Class Associated with a Table Template<br />

When you select the attribute columns to be included in a component table template, it<br />

is useful to have these columns labeled with the names that appear when the table is<br />

displayed. Since these names depend on the classes displayed in the table, <strong>Status</strong> lets<br />

you associate a component class with each template for that purpose. This association<br />

does not prevent you from displaying components from other classes in a table that uses<br />

that template.<br />

To select the component class associated with a table template<br />

1. Click the value labeled Class for that template. <strong>Status</strong> opens a dialog window<br />

containing a list of all classes in the current classification.<br />

2. Double-click the name of the desired class. Click Unknown if you want no<br />

component class associated with the template. In that case, <strong>Status</strong> displays generic<br />

attribute names when you select the columns to be included in the template.<br />

5.2.4. Changing the Attribute Columns in a Table Template<br />

When you open a component table, its table template determines which attribute<br />

columns appear and the order in which they appear. The Attributes column in the Define<br />

Component Tables table shows the column order for each table template. Column<br />

names for each template are listed one per line.<br />

To change the attribute columns for a table template<br />

1. Click a value in the column labeled Attributes. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window<br />

containing a list of all attribute columns that are currently included in the table<br />

template, and another list of all possible attribute columns for the component class<br />

associated with that template. Because there are many columns, this dialog window<br />

includes scroll bars.<br />

5–18 7833 4778–008


Defining Component Table Templates<br />

2. Click the attribute column names you want in the order you want them. You can also<br />

click a column you selected earlier to deselect it.<br />

3. Click OK when you have finished selecting columns.<br />

Notes:<br />

• There are columns listed for each site-defined attribute in the component class<br />

associated with the template. These columns are labeled with the attribute names<br />

defined for the component class, which are the same names that appear as column<br />

headings when you open a table using the template. If you have not associated a<br />

component class with the template, site-defined attributes are identified by their<br />

generic names, and you must refer to the classification definition to determine how<br />

each generic attribute name maps with the actual attribute name for any particular<br />

component class.<br />

• There are three columns for the Seen attribute:<br />

• Seen (toggle)—Lets you toggle the Seen attribute in a component table simply<br />

by clicking it. It is suggested you use the Seen (toggle) column in table templates<br />

with static behavior.<br />

• Seen (dialog)—Lets you change the Seen attribute by using a dialog window, so<br />

you are less likely to change the attribute inadvertently. It is suggested you use<br />

the Seen (dialog) column in table templates with dynamic behavior, and in the<br />

Components with Unexpected Values table template.<br />

• Seen (delete)—Lets you change the Seen attribute by using a dialog window.<br />

Also lets you delete a component after changing the Seen attribute to yes. Use<br />

Seen (delete) in table templates for which you want to provide the capability to<br />

delete components.<br />

Do not include more than one of these columns in the same table template.<br />

• There are two columns for the Message attribute:<br />

− Message (narrow)—Displays the Message attribute truncated to 10 characters.<br />

− Message (wide)—Displays the Message attribute truncated to 40 characters.<br />

Either column allows you to see the entire message by clicking it. Do not include<br />

both columns in the same table template.<br />

5.2.5. Adding New Component Group Table Templates<br />

To add new Component Group table templates<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define Component Tables table. <strong>Status</strong> displays a<br />

pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Add Tables. <strong>Status</strong> asks for the names of one or more new table templates.<br />

3. Enter the names of the table templates, and press Enter at the end of each name.<br />

4. Click OK. <strong>Status</strong> creates the new table templates with default values for size,<br />

behavior, associated class, and attributes. You can then change these default<br />

values, as described earlier in this section.<br />

7833 4778–008 5–19


Defining Component Table Templates<br />

5.2.6. Deleting Existing Component Group Table Templates<br />

To delete existing Component Group table templates<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define Component Tables table. <strong>Status</strong> displays a<br />

pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Delete Tables. <strong>Status</strong> displays a menu of all Component Group table templates<br />

currently defined.<br />

3. Double-click to delete a single table template. To delete multiple table templates,<br />

click once on the name of each table template and then click OK. Click Cancel if you<br />

decide not to delete any table templates.<br />

5.2.7. Selecting a Different Component Group Table Template<br />

as the Default<br />

When you create a new component group, one table template is automatically<br />

associated with the component group. This table template is the default.<br />

To select a different template as the default<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define Component Tables table. <strong>Status</strong> displays a<br />

pull-down menu.<br />

2. Click Change Default. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing all Component<br />

Group table templates currently defined.<br />

3. Select one Component Group table template to be the new default. The default<br />

template appears in bold in the Define Component Tables table.<br />

5–20 7833 4778–008


5.3. Saving a Diagram Definition<br />

Saving a Diagram Definition<br />

After making any number of changes to component groups and component table<br />

templates, you can save the current values for all these items as a named diagram<br />

definition. This diagram definition can replace the current diagram definition, or it can be<br />

a new diagram definition.<br />

5.3.1. Replacing the Current Diagram Definition<br />

If your user class allows it, you can replace the current diagram definition as follows:<br />

1. Click Diagrams in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the Diagrams menu.<br />

2. Click Save Diagram. <strong>Status</strong> replaces the previously saved information with the<br />

current specifications.<br />

Note: If you did not select a named diagram definition when you started <strong>Status</strong>, <strong>Status</strong><br />

used an unnamed default diagram (indicated by ““ in the title bar and About<br />

window). In this case, <strong>Status</strong> asks you for a diagram name, since the default diagram<br />

has no name.<br />

5.3.2. Saving a New Diagram Definition<br />

To save a new diagram definition<br />

1. Click Diagrams in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the Diagrams menu.<br />

2. Click Save Diagram As. <strong>Status</strong> asks for the name of the new diagram definition.<br />

3. Enter the name of the new diagram definition, and click OK. <strong>Status</strong> verifies that the<br />

name does not match the name of an existing diagram definition for the current<br />

combination of classification and configuration, and then saves the current<br />

specifications as a new diagram definition with the name you specified. The name of<br />

the new diagram definition replaces the name of the previous diagram definition in<br />

the title bar of the <strong>Status</strong> diagram.<br />

7833 4778–008 5–21


Deleting Diagram Definitions<br />

5.4. Deleting Diagram Definitions<br />

If your user class allows it, you can delete one or more diagram definitions as follows:<br />

1. Click Diagrams in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the Diagrams menu.<br />

2. Click Delete Diagrams. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing the names of all<br />

diagrams currently defined for the current combination of classification and<br />

configuration.<br />

3. Double-click the desired diagram name to delete a single diagram. To select multiple<br />

diagrams from this list, click once on each diagram name and click OK. <strong>Status</strong> then<br />

deletes their definitions.<br />

A diagram definition depends on both the configuration and the classification under<br />

which it was defined. When the definition of a configuration or classification is deleted<br />

using the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration application, all diagram definitions related<br />

to the configuration or classification are automatically deleted.<br />

5–22 7833 4778–008


Changing the Diagram Definition in Use<br />

5.5. Changing the Diagram Definition in Use<br />

You can replace the current diagram definition used by <strong>Status</strong> with any other diagram<br />

defined for the current configuration and classification, as follows:<br />

1. Click File in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the File menu.<br />

2. Click Select Diagram. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing the names of all<br />

diagram definitions for the current combination of classification and configuration.<br />

3. Select a diagram definition from this list. (Select Cancel if you decide not to change<br />

the diagram definition.)<br />

If you select Unknown instead of a diagram definition, <strong>Status</strong> creates a new diagram<br />

definition and asks you to choose one of the following options:<br />

• Create one component group for each combination of host and component class. If<br />

you choose this option, <strong>Status</strong> creates a component group for every combination of<br />

host and class for which components can exist. The icons for these groups are<br />

arranged in evenly spaced rows and columns in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram. In Figure 5-3,<br />

icons were created for each configuration of the 3 host systems in configuration<br />

UnixOnly, and the 6 component classes in classification UnixMon.<br />

• Create one component group for each component class. If you choose this option,<br />

<strong>Status</strong> creates a component group for each component class; each group contains<br />

components from all hosts. The icons for these groups are evenly arranged in one,<br />

two, or three rows in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, depending on the number of icons present.<br />

(See Figure 5-4.)<br />

• Create one component group for each component class, with subgroups for each<br />

host. If you choose this option, <strong>Status</strong> creates a status diagram containing one<br />

component group for each component class, just as with the previous option. With<br />

this option, <strong>Status</strong> also creates subgroups for each of these top-level groups. When<br />

you click any icon in the status diagram, a subgroup window opens. This window<br />

contains one subgroup for each host to which the components in the parent class<br />

can belong.<br />

• Create no default groups. If you choose this option, <strong>Status</strong> displays a <strong>Status</strong> diagram<br />

containing no groups.<br />

After choosing any of these options, you can change the new diagram definition created<br />

for you, as described in 5.1 and 5.2. If you save these changes, <strong>Status</strong> then asks you to<br />

supply a name for the new diagram definition.<br />

7833 4778–008 5–23


Changing the Diagram Definition in Use<br />

Figure 5–3. A Component Group for Each Combination of Host and<br />

Component Class<br />

Figure 5–4. A Component Group for Each Component Class<br />

5–24 7833 4778–008


After you select a diagram definition, <strong>Status</strong><br />

Changing the Diagram Definition in Use<br />

• Removes from the screen all of its open windows, such as the <strong>Status</strong> diagram,<br />

component tables, and attribute lists.<br />

• Erases all current diagram specifications.<br />

• Reads the diagram specifications from the diagram definition you selected.<br />

• Determines which components being monitored belong in which groups of the new<br />

diagram definition.<br />

• Displays the <strong>Status</strong> diagram associated with the new diagram definition.<br />

7833 4778–008 5–25


Changing the Diagram Definition in Use<br />

5–26 7833 4778–008


Section 6<br />

Component Sets<br />

This section explains how to<br />

• Define components explicitly<br />

• Save component definitions in named component sets<br />

• Delete previously defined component sets<br />

• Retrieve component definitions previously saved in component sets<br />

7833 4778–008 6–1


Defining Components Explicitly<br />

6.1. Defining Components Explicitly<br />

In most cases, you can rely on Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> to create components<br />

automatically based on the receipt of event reports. Sometimes, however, you may<br />

choose to define components explicitly so that you can specify nondefault values for<br />

specified attributes, such as expected and alarm values.<br />

To start defining components<br />

1. Click Component Sets in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the<br />

Component Sets menu.<br />

2. Click Define Components. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window listing all hosts in the<br />

current configuration.<br />

3. Select one of the hosts. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window listing all component<br />

classes in the current classification.<br />

4. Select one of the component classes. <strong>Status</strong> displays the Edit Components table,<br />

described next.<br />

6.1.1. Edit Components Table<br />

The Edit Components table contains a row for each component currently modeled by<br />

<strong>Status</strong> for the selected host and class. The table title indicates the host and class of the<br />

components. The first column shows the name of each component for this host and<br />

class. The remaining columns display each specified attribute whose value you can<br />

change. Click any of these values to change them. Figure 6-1 shows the Edit<br />

Components table.<br />

Figure 6–1. Edit Components Table<br />

Click Help to display the Help menu. You can use this menu to display general<br />

information about this table, including information on individual columns.<br />

6–2 7833 4778–008


Defining Components Explicitly<br />

6.1.2. Changes You Can Make to Component Definitions<br />

You can use the Edit Components table to make the following changes to component<br />

definitions:<br />

• Indicate whether a component was explicitly defined.<br />

• Specify the scope of a component.<br />

• Specify the instruction file associated with a component.<br />

• Specify expected and alarm values for any status attributes defined for the<br />

component class.<br />

• Specify minimum and maximum threshold values for any numeric attributes defined<br />

for the component class.<br />

• Add definitions for new components.<br />

• Delete definitions for existing components.<br />

6.1.3. Indicating Whether a Component Was Explicitly Defined<br />

Click a value in the column labeled <strong>User</strong> Defined? to toggle between the values yes and<br />

no. The following table explains when the attribute is set to each value.<br />

The attribute is set to... For components that were...<br />

Yes Defined explicitly or defined in a component set<br />

selected by the user.<br />

No Created upon receipt of an event report.<br />

The value of the <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute controls the behavior of <strong>Status</strong> if it loses<br />

connection to a host and re-establishes that connection. If <strong>User</strong> Defined is no for a<br />

component belonging to that host, the component is deleted when the connection is reestablished.<br />

Presumably, <strong>Status</strong> will subsequently receive an event report for that<br />

component and automatically add the component back into its data model. If <strong>User</strong><br />

Defined is yes, the component is not deleted when the connection is re-established, but<br />

the values of all its reported attributes are reset to the unreported state (shown by a<br />

hyphen in component tables).<br />

Note: A component is deleted or has its attribute values reset when a host connection<br />

is re-established only if the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> administrator set Reinitialize? to yes<br />

for the component class during classification definition. (See 7.3.)<br />

The value of the <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute can be used to control which components are<br />

saved in a component set. For details, see 6.2.<br />

6.1.4. Specifying the Scope of a Component<br />

As explained in 4.2, a component can have a scope of<br />

• Host—The component is limited to a single host.<br />

7833 4778–008 6–3


Defining Components Explicitly<br />

• Shared—The component scope includes all hosts monitored by <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

Click the value in the Component Scope column to toggle between the values of Host<br />

and Shared.<br />

6.1.5. Specifying the Instruction File<br />

To specify the instruction file associated with a component<br />

1. Click a value in the Instruction File column. <strong>Status</strong> asks for the instruction file name.<br />

2. Enter the file name, and click OK. The file might not exist initially. <strong>Status</strong> asks if you<br />

want to edit the instruction file.<br />

3. Choose yes or no. If you choose yes, <strong>Status</strong> displays an edit window with the<br />

current contents of the instruction file, if any. When you are finished editing, you can<br />

save or discard the changes when you close the edit window.<br />

The edit window for instruction text works like the edit window for notes described in<br />

4.2.6.<br />

6.1.6. Specifying Expected or Alarm Values for <strong>Status</strong><br />

Attributes<br />

If your user class allows it, you can specify expected or alarm values for any status<br />

attributes defined for the component class. These values appear in the Edit Components<br />

table in columns labeled with the attribute name, preceded by the word Expected or<br />

Alarm.<br />

To specify expected values for a status attribute<br />

1. Click a value in the Expected attribute column. Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

displays a dialog window listing all possible status values for the attribute, except for<br />

any values selected earlier as alarm values.<br />

2. Select one or more expected values, or select Unknown to specify no expected<br />

values. If you select Unknown, Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> sets the expected<br />

value for the component to the next value received for the attribute in an event<br />

report, provided this value is not an alarm value.<br />

To specify alarm values for a status attribute<br />

1. Click a value in the Alarm attribute column. Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> displays a<br />

dialog window listing all possible values for the attribute, except for any values<br />

selected earlier as expected values.<br />

2. Select one or more alarm values, or select Unknown to specify no alarm values.<br />

To add or remove values from the set of possible values for a status attribute, use the<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration application. For details, see 7.5.<br />

6–4 7833 4778–008


Defining Components Explicitly<br />

6.1.7. Specifying Minimum and Maximum Threshold Values<br />

If your user class allows it, you can specify minimum and maximum threshold values for<br />

any numeric attributes defined for the component class. Each numeric attribute can<br />

have four threshold values: minimum alarm, minimum attention, maximum attention, and<br />

maximum alarm. The values appear in the Edit Components table in columns labeled<br />

with the attribute name, preceded by the following: Min Alarm, Min Attn, Max Attn, and<br />

Max Alarm.<br />

To specify a minimum or maximum threshold value<br />

1. Click a value in the Min Alarm, Min Attn, Max Attn, or Max Alarm attribute column.<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> asks for the new threshold value.<br />

2. Enter the new threshold value, or click Unknown to disable checking of that<br />

threshold.<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> prevents you from specifying a value that is out of order.<br />

For example, you cannot specify a Min Attn value that is less than the Min Alarm value or<br />

greater than the Max Attn value.<br />

6.1.8. Defining New Components<br />

To add definitions for new components<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Edit Components table. <strong>Status</strong> displays a pull-down<br />

menu.<br />

2. Click Add Components.<br />

3. Enter the names of all new components to be added for the selected host and class.<br />

If you enter more than one, press Enter after each name. For each name you enter,<br />

<strong>Status</strong> creates a new component, sets its <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute to yes, gives<br />

default values to all other specified attributes based on the component class, and<br />

adds a row at the end of the table to display the component. You can change any<br />

values for these new components, as described earlier.<br />

6.1.9. Deleting Components<br />

To delete definitions of existing components<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Edit Components table. <strong>Status</strong> displays a pull-down<br />

menu.<br />

2. Click Delete. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing the names of all<br />

components for the selected host and class.<br />

3. Double-click to delete a single component. Click once each component name to<br />

select multiple components to be deleted, then click OK. Click Cancel if you decide<br />

not to delete any components.<br />

You can delete components only if your user class allows you to perform this action.<br />

7833 4778–008 6–5


Defining Components Explicitly<br />

6.1.10. Defining Components for a Different Host or Class<br />

After you have finished defining components for one host and class, you can start<br />

defining components for a different host or class as follows:<br />

1. Click Reselect in the menu bar of the Edit Components table. <strong>Status</strong> displays a pulldown<br />

menu.<br />

2. Click one of the menu items:<br />

• Select Different Host<br />

• Select Different Class<br />

• Select Different Host & Class<br />

Depending on your selection, <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window of available hosts, a<br />

dialog window of available component classes, or both.<br />

3. Select the desired hosts or classes. <strong>Status</strong> redisplays the Edit Components table<br />

with components of the selected host and class. If you select a different component<br />

class, the columns in the table change to reflect the attributes defined in the new<br />

class.<br />

6–6 7833 4778–008


6.2. Saving Component Set Definitions<br />

Saving Component Set Definitions<br />

At any time while running <strong>Status</strong>, if your user class allows, you can save some or all of<br />

the currently defined components as a named component set.<br />

6.2.1. Saving a New Component Set Definition<br />

To create a new component set<br />

1. Click Component Sets in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the<br />

Component Sets menu.<br />

2. Click Save Component Set As. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing a list of all<br />

component classes in the current classification.<br />

3. Select one or more of these component classes, or click Unknown to select all<br />

component classes. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window containing a list of all hosts in<br />

the current configuration.<br />

4. Select one or more hosts, or click Unknown to select all hosts. <strong>Status</strong> asks if you<br />

want to save all components of the selected hosts and classes, or only components<br />

for which the <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute is set to yes.<br />

5. Specify whether you want to save all components or only user-defined ones.<br />

6. <strong>Status</strong> asks for the name to be given to the component set. Enter a name for the<br />

component set (select Cancel if you decide not to save the component set). <strong>Status</strong><br />

saves the components you selected as a component set with the specified name. If<br />

the name you specified is the name of another component set defined for the<br />

current configuration and classification, <strong>Status</strong> asks if you want to overwrite the<br />

existing component set. If you answer No, the new component set is not saved.<br />

Note: Regardless of the value of the <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute of each component when<br />

the component set is saved, the <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute is set to yes for each component<br />

when the component set is retrieved.<br />

6.2.2. Replacing a Component Set Definition<br />

At any time while running <strong>Status</strong>, if your user class allows, you can replace the<br />

components in a previously defined component set by the components in the same<br />

hosts and classes currently being monitored by <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

To replace a component set<br />

1. Click Component Sets in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the<br />

Component Sets menu.<br />

2. Click Save Component Set. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window listing all component<br />

sets defined for the current configuration and classification.<br />

3. Click the name of the component set you want to replace. <strong>Status</strong> asks if you want<br />

to save all components of the hosts and classes selected for the component set, or<br />

only components whose <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute is set to yes (see 6.1.3).<br />

7833 4778–008 6–7


Saving Component Set Definitions<br />

4. Select whether you want to save all components or only user-defined ones. <strong>Status</strong><br />

displays a dialog window stating for which classes and hosts components will be<br />

saved, and asking for your confirmation to continue.<br />

5. Click Continue to replace the component set you selected, or click Cancel if you<br />

decide to leave this component set unchanged.<br />

Note: Regardless of the value of the <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute of each component when<br />

the component set is saved, the <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute is set to yes for each component<br />

when the component set is retrieved.<br />

6–8 7833 4778–008


Deleting Component Set Definitions<br />

6.3. Deleting Component Set Definitions<br />

If your user class allows, you can delete one or more previously defined component sets<br />

for the current configuration and classification, as follows:<br />

1. Click Component Sets in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the<br />

Component Sets menu.<br />

2. Click Delete Component Sets. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window listing all component<br />

sets in the current configuration and classification.<br />

3. Double-click the desired component set name to delete a single component set. To<br />

select multiple component sets to be deleted, click once on the name of each<br />

component set and then click OK.<br />

Note: A component set definition depends on the configuration and classification in<br />

which it was defined. When the definition of a configuration or classification is deleted<br />

using the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration application, all component sets related to<br />

the configuration or classification are automatically deleted.<br />

7833 4778–008 6–9


Retrieving a Component Set<br />

6.4. Retrieving a Component Set<br />

You can retrieve component definitions that were saved previously in component sets as<br />

follows:<br />

1. Click File in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram menu bar. <strong>Status</strong> displays the File menu.<br />

2. Click Retrieve Component Sets. <strong>Status</strong> displays a dialog window listing all<br />

component sets for the current combination of classification and configuration.<br />

3. Double-click the component set name to select a single component set. To select<br />

multiple component sets from the dialog window, click once on each component set<br />

and then click OK.<br />

After you select component sets, <strong>Status</strong> reads the information in each component set<br />

consecutively. For each component in these sets, <strong>Status</strong><br />

1. Determines whether a component matching the one in the component set already<br />

exists. If not, <strong>Status</strong> creates such a component.<br />

Note: When you define a component class using the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Configuration application, you can specify the creation scheme as automatic,<br />

explicit_only, or none. If the creation scheme is none, <strong>Status</strong> does not create<br />

components in this class under any circumstances, even if you retrieve a component<br />

set containing them. For further information, see 7.3.<br />

2. Sets the <strong>User</strong> Defined attribute to yes, signifying that the component was created<br />

through explicit user action.<br />

3. Sets the values of all specified attributes of the component based on the information<br />

stored in the component set definition, overwriting any existing values. If a<br />

component is defined in more than one of the selected component sets, <strong>Status</strong> uses<br />

the values from the last component set selected. Therefore, the order in which you<br />

select component sets may be important.<br />

Note: When you retrieve a component set, <strong>Status</strong> never deletes components that were<br />

previously defined. If an existing component does not appear in any of the component<br />

sets you select, then <strong>Status</strong> leaves that component unchanged.<br />

6–10 7833 4778–008


Section 7<br />

Defining Classifications<br />

This section explains how to<br />

• Define <strong>Status</strong> classifications<br />

• Change component class characteristics<br />

• Add and delete component classes<br />

• Configure site-defined attributes<br />

7833 4778–008 7–1


<strong>Status</strong> Configuration Overview<br />

7.1. <strong>Status</strong> Configuration Overview<br />

Some capabilities of the Configuration application apply specifically to <strong>Status</strong>. In addition<br />

to defining configurations for use by both Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console and <strong>Status</strong>,<br />

you can use the Configuration application to<br />

• Define classifications, which contain the classes of components monitored<br />

simultaneously by <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

• Specify the basic characteristics of component classes.<br />

• Configure site-defined attributes within component classes.<br />

• Specify <strong>Status</strong> functions to be restricted for different user classes.<br />

• Select default resource sets for different users.<br />

• Define external applications that can be initiated from <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

The first three of these tasks are described in the remainder of this section. The last<br />

three of these tasks are described in the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

A configuration and a classification are independent definitions. A classification is not<br />

associated with a single configuration, and a configuration is not associated with a single<br />

classification.<br />

You can perform the following functions with the Configuration application only if your<br />

site has purchased and installed the Department or Enterprise Edition of Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong>:<br />

• Define new classifications<br />

• Define new component classes in a predefined classification<br />

• Define new site-defined attributes in a predefined classification<br />

If only Basic Edition of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> is installed, the menu entries for these<br />

functions are disabled.<br />

7–2 7833 4778–008


7.2. Defining <strong>Status</strong> Classifications<br />

7.2.1. Creating or Editing a Classification<br />

Defining <strong>Status</strong> Classifications<br />

Use the following procedure to create a new classification or to edit an existing<br />

classification:<br />

1. Click Application in the menu bar of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration.<br />

2. Click Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification.<br />

The Configuration application determines whether the environment variable<br />

SPCLASSIFICATION is defined and contains a nonnull value, and responds in one of<br />

two ways the first time you select a classification:<br />

• If the environment variable SPCLASSIFICATION was set to a nonnull value<br />

before you started the Configuration application, the Configuration application<br />

uses its value as the name of the classification to be edited. However, if a<br />

classification with this name does not exist, a message is displayed and you are<br />

asked to select another classification.<br />

• If the environment variable SPCLASSIFICATION was not set, the Configuration<br />

application displays a dialog window listing the available classifications.<br />

3. From the list of available classifications, perform one of the following actions:<br />

• Select the classification you want to edit.<br />

• Click Unknown to create a new classification.<br />

The Configuration application displays the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification table, as<br />

shown in the following illustration.<br />

Figure 7–1. Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification Table<br />

7833 4778–008 7–3


Defining <strong>Status</strong> Classifications<br />

If you clicked Unknown to create a new classification, the table is empty and <br />

appears in the window title. The Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification table has<br />

• One row for each component class defined in the classification, listed in<br />

alphabetical order by class name<br />

• One column for each basic characteristic of component classes that you can<br />

change<br />

Click Help in the menu bar to display help text about the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification<br />

table.<br />

4. Use the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification table to change the following component class<br />

characteristics:<br />

Internal Class<br />

The internal class for this component class. Special internal classes are used for<br />

monitoring host systems and system consoles.<br />

System Types<br />

The types of host systems that can contain components of this class. These<br />

include MCP, OS 2200, ANSI X3.64, Windows, and Arbitrary.<br />

Class Label<br />

The label <strong>Status</strong> uses for default component groups that contain components of<br />

this component class.<br />

Icon Bitmap<br />

The name of the icon bitmap file used for default component groups that contain<br />

components of this class.<br />

Default Scope<br />

The scope used as a default for all new components of this class. This can be<br />

Host or Shared.<br />

Creation Scheme<br />

The creation scheme for components of this class. This can be automatic,<br />

explicit-only, or none.<br />

Init Mnemonic [OS 2200 MCP]<br />

The mnemonic by which the data collector on the host system knows this<br />

component class. Used only for OS 2200 and MCP component classes.<br />

Reinitialize<br />

Indicates if components of this class should be reinitialized when <strong>Status</strong><br />

reestablishes a connection with the host system to which the components<br />

belong.<br />

Instruction File<br />

The name of the instruction file used as a default for all new components of this<br />

class.<br />

7–4 7833 4778–008


Defining <strong>Status</strong> Classifications<br />

Retain Notes<br />

Indicates whether operator notes created for a component are deleted<br />

automatically when the component is deleted.<br />

Alarm text<br />

The alarm text that is displayed in the Configuration Alarms window when an<br />

attribute of a component in this class attains an alarm-level unexpected value.<br />

This text can contain keywords to indicate the substitution of variable<br />

information. A value of Unknown indicates that <strong>Status</strong> should not raise alarms<br />

for components in this class.<br />

For further information on changing component class characteristics, see 7.3.<br />

5. Click the File menu and then Exit Classification Definition to close the Define <strong>Status</strong><br />

Classification table. If you have made changes to the classification that you have not<br />

saved, the Configuration application asks whether you want to save the changes<br />

before closing the table.<br />

7.2.2. Selecting a Different Classification<br />

Use the following procedure to select a different classification or to create a new<br />

classification:<br />

1. Click the File menu in the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window.<br />

2. Click Select Classification. The Configuration application displays a dialog window<br />

with the names of available classifications.<br />

3. Click the name of the classification you want to change, or click Unknown to create a<br />

new classification. The Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification table displays component<br />

classes for the classification you selected.<br />

If you clicked Unknown to create a new classification, the table is empty.<br />

If you made changes to the previous classification that you have not saved, the<br />

Configuration application asks if you want to save the changes before it closes the<br />

previous classification.<br />

7.2.3. Saving Classifications<br />

After you change the component class definitions in a classification, you can replace the<br />

previous definitions with the new definitions using the following procedure:<br />

1. Click the File menu of the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window.<br />

2. Click one of the following to perform the desired action:<br />

• Save Classification<br />

Saves the changed class definitions under the current classification name. The<br />

Configuration application then replaces the previous definitions with the new<br />

definitions. If you are editing a new classification, the Configuration application<br />

asks you to name it at this time.<br />

7833 4778–008 7–5


Defining <strong>Status</strong> Classifications<br />

• Save Classification As<br />

Creates a new classification and leaves the old one intact. A dialog window<br />

opens. Enter the name of the new classification. Click Explain for a description<br />

of the guidelines the name must conform to. The classification is saved when<br />

you click OK. The new classification becomes the current classification, and its<br />

name appears in the title bar of the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification table, and in the<br />

About window.<br />

Note: If a user of <strong>Status</strong> is currently using the classification you saved, the changes you<br />

made are not visible until the other user does a Select Classification.<br />

7.2.4. Deleting Classifications<br />

Use the following procedure to delete one or more classifications. Once you delete a<br />

classification, you can no longer retrieve it.<br />

1. Click the File menu of the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification table.<br />

2. Click Delete Classifications. A dialog window opens.<br />

3. Select one or more classifications.<br />

4. Click OK to delete them.<br />

You cannot delete a classification that<br />

• You are currently editing<br />

• Another user of the Configuration application is editing<br />

• Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> is using<br />

Diagram definitions and component sets depend on both the configuration and<br />

classification under which they were defined. When you delete a classification, all<br />

diagram definitions and component sets related to it are automatically deleted.<br />

7–6 7833 4778–008


Changing Component Class Characteristics<br />

7.3. Changing Component Class Characteristics<br />

The following subsection provides information on changing class characteristics.<br />

7.3.1. Renaming a Component Class<br />

To rename a component class, click the name of the component class in the Define<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Classification table. A pop-up menu with two entries appears:<br />

• Edit Class<br />

Click this entry to bring up the characteristics list for the class. (See 7.6.)<br />

• Rename Class<br />

Click this entry to bring up a dialog window for renaming the class.<br />

Since the component classes in the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification table are listed in<br />

alphabetical order, the position of a class may change when you rename it.<br />

When you rename component classes, all diagram definitions and component sets<br />

associated with the classification being edited are rewritten to reflect the name changes<br />

when the classification is saved. This can be time consuming.<br />

7.3.2. Selecting the Internal Class<br />

Click the value in the Internal Class column to change the internal class for a component<br />

class. The possible values for Internal Class are<br />

• OS2200—Use only for the component class that represents OS 2200 host systems.<br />

• CONSOLE—Use only for the component class that represents OS 2200 system<br />

consoles.<br />

• MCP—Use only for the component class that represents MCP host systems.<br />

• ANSI_X3_64—Use only for the component class that represents UNIX host systems.<br />

• GENERAL—Use for all other types of components you want to monitor with <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

You can assign each internal class, except GENERAL, to no more than one component<br />

class. All internal classes except GENERAL automatically include extra attributes that<br />

monitor the operating state and connections of the host systems or system consoles<br />

modeled by the components in the class. These extra attributes are described in 4.4,<br />

4.5, 4.6, and 4.7. Each of these component classes must include a status attribute<br />

named “<strong>Status</strong>.” (See 7.5.)<br />

7.3.3. Selecting System Types<br />

Click a value in the System Types column to specify the types of hosts to which a<br />

component class applies. <strong>Status</strong> creates and monitors components of a class only for<br />

those types of host systems to which the class applies. Not all component classes apply<br />

7833 4778–008 7–7


Changing Component Class Characteristics<br />

to all types of hosts. Some component classes may apply to more than one type of host.<br />

The System Types value lets <strong>Status</strong> know which component classes are associated with<br />

which types of hosts. These types include MCP, OS 2200, ANSI X3.64, Windows, and<br />

Arbitrary.<br />

For example, suppose you want to monitor tape drives on OS 2200 systems. When you<br />

define the component class for tape drives, select OS 2200 as its only System Type.<br />

Note: You must specify a value for this class characteristic. If you leave it unspecified,<br />

<strong>Status</strong> does not monitor any components of this class.<br />

7.3.4. Changing the Class Label<br />

Click a value in the Class Label column to change the label used by <strong>Status</strong> to identify a<br />

class of components. The Configuration application opens a dialog window and queries<br />

you for the label. The label can include any sequence of characters and can span<br />

multiple lines. This label is included in the labels of the default component groups<br />

created by <strong>Status</strong>. (See 5.1.)<br />

7.3.5. Selecting the Icon Family<br />

In the Configuration application, you can select a default icon family for each component<br />

class. <strong>Status</strong> uses this icon family to depict the default component groups it creates for<br />

components of this class (see 5.1.). All icons in the <strong>Status</strong> diagram are customizable.<br />

To select an icon family for a component class, click the value in the Icon column. The<br />

Configuration application opens a dialog window from which you choose the desired icon<br />

family.<br />

To display the icons comprising an icon family<br />

1. Click Edit in the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification menu bar.<br />

2. Click Display Icon Family.<br />

3. Select the name of an icon family from the dialog window showing all available icon<br />

families.<br />

A window appears showing icons representing the normal, attention, alarm, and empty<br />

states depicted by <strong>Status</strong>:<br />

• If the icons in the family are bitmaps, they all have the same size and shape but<br />

different colors.<br />

• If the icons in the family are pixmaps, their size, shape, and color can vary for each<br />

state.<br />

In Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Level 7.4, the icons supplied with <strong>Status</strong> changed from singlecolor<br />

bitmap icons to multicolor, three-dimensional pixmap icons. Existing diagrams can<br />

continue to use the bitmap icons, or you can update the icons.<br />

7–8 7833 4778–008


Changing Component Class Characteristics<br />

The Configuration application enables you to update all obsolete bitmap icons in a<br />

classification for a single operation:<br />

1. Select Edit in the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification menu bar.<br />

2. Select Upgrade Obsolete Icons.<br />

3. Click Yes to upgrade all obsolete icons in the classification<br />

Note: The Upgrade Obsolete Icons menu entry is disabled if the diagram does not use<br />

any obsolete bitmap icons.<br />

See Appendix F for a description of the <strong>Status</strong> icon families that are supplied with Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

7.3.6. Selecting the Default Scope<br />

Click a value in the Default Scope column to change the default scope for components in<br />

a component class. Whenever <strong>Status</strong> automatically creates a component in the<br />

component class based upon receipt of an AC event report, <strong>Status</strong> sets the scope of the<br />

component to the specified value. This table explains the possible values of the scope.<br />

Value Description<br />

Host The scope of the component is limited to a single host. Two<br />

components with the same name and class on different hosts<br />

refer to different actual components.<br />

Shared The scope of the component includes all hosts monitored by<br />

<strong>Status</strong>. Two logical components with the same name and class<br />

and with a scope of Shared refer to the same actual component.<br />

For example, specify a scope of Shared for disks that are shared<br />

across multiple systems.<br />

For a further discussion on component scope, see 4.2.<br />

7.3.7. Selecting the Creation Scheme<br />

Click a value in the Creation Scheme column to change the creation scheme for<br />

components of a class. The value you select determines how <strong>Status</strong> handles an event<br />

report it receives for a component of this class that does not already exist.<br />

This table lists the possible Creation Scheme values.<br />

Value Description<br />

automatic If <strong>Status</strong> receives an event report for a component of this class<br />

that it is not already monitoring, it automatically creates the<br />

component and processes the event report. This is the default<br />

value.<br />

explicit_only <strong>Status</strong> ignores event reports for components of this class that are<br />

7833 4778–008 7–9


Changing Component Class Characteristics<br />

Value Description<br />

not already defined. However, an entry is made in the <strong>Status</strong> log<br />

(SP-STATUS) for these event reports if you have set the trace level<br />

in <strong>Status</strong> to partial or full (see 2.5). You can define a component of<br />

this class only by explicit action (see 6.1), or by retrieving a<br />

component set containing the component (see 2.4 and 6.4).<br />

none <strong>Status</strong> does not monitor components in this class under any<br />

circumstances and ignores all event reports for components of<br />

this class. If a user of <strong>Status</strong> retrieves a component set containing<br />

a component in this class, <strong>Status</strong> ignores the component. Use<br />

this value to effectively remove from a classification a component<br />

class that you might want to restore later.<br />

7.3.8. Selecting the Initialization Mnemonic [OS 2200 MCP]<br />

Click a value in the Init Mnemonic column to change the initialization mnemonic, which<br />

applies only to component classes with a System Type of OS 2200 or MCP. The<br />

initialization mnemonic is used when <strong>Status</strong> calls the data collector to send initial<br />

attribute values. The data collector identifies the component class by its initialization<br />

mnemonic. For further information on the data collectors, see 2.1.<br />

This table lists the possible values for the initialization mnemonic.<br />

Value Description System Type<br />

sys Host system OS 2200<br />

tape Tape drive OS 2200<br />

7–10 7833 4778–008<br />

MCP<br />

disk Disk drive OS 2200<br />

MCP<br />

ip Instruction processor OS 2200<br />

iop Input/output processor OS 2200<br />

chan Channel OS 2200<br />

cu Control unit OS 2200<br />

sa Storage area OS 2200<br />

dev Any other device OS 2200<br />

printer Printer MCP<br />

application Application program registered with<br />

API library<br />

MCP<br />

When you click the initialization mnemonic value for component classes whose System<br />

Types include OS 2200 and MCP, a list of possible values is displayed.


Changing Component Class Characteristics<br />

Note: If you specify an initialization mnemonic for any MCP component class, you must<br />

include a class with an Internal Class of MCP in the classification; otherwise, the<br />

component class is not initialized by the MCP data collector. If you specify an<br />

initialization mnemonic for any OS 2200 component class, you do not need to include a<br />

class with an Internal Class of OS2200 in the classification, but it is recommended that<br />

you do.<br />

7.3.9. Changing the Initialization Mnemonic [UNIX Windows<br />

Other]<br />

The Init Mnemonic column does not apply to component classes with a System Type of<br />

ANSI X3.64, Windows, or Arbitrary. The initialization mnemonic value is always<br />

Unknown, since there is no data collector for these types of host systems.<br />

7.3.10. Specifying Reinitialization<br />

Reinitialization determines if components in a class are reinitialized when the host that<br />

the components are associated with reestablishes a connection to <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

If set to yes (the default), all dynamically created components are deleted when the<br />

connection is reestablished. The components that were explicitly created or were read in<br />

from a component set have all their reported attribute values reset to defaults. Select<br />

yes if the agent that reports component information depends on the connection between<br />

<strong>Status</strong> and the host system.<br />

If set to No, the components in that class will not be deleted or otherwise reinitialized<br />

when a connection is reestablished with the host. Select no if the agent that reports the<br />

component information can continue to operate even when the connection between<br />

<strong>Status</strong> and the host system is down.<br />

Reinitialization is specified on a class by class basis, providing maximum flexibility. To<br />

change the value, click the Reinitialize value for the class to change it from yes to no or<br />

no to yes.<br />

7833 4778–008 7–11


Changing Component Class Characteristics<br />

Figure 7–2. Changing the Reinitialize Value<br />

7.3.11. Specifying the Instruction File<br />

Click on a value in the Instruction File column to change the default file containing<br />

operator instructions for components in a class. You can override this default for<br />

individual components within the component class using <strong>Status</strong>, as described in 6.1.5.<br />

To specify an instruction file<br />

1. Click a value in the Instruction File column. The Configuration application asks for the<br />

file name.<br />

2. Enter the file name, or click Cancel to leave the file name unchanged. You can<br />

specify an existing text file or a file that does not previously exist.<br />

3. After you specify the file name, the Configuration application asks if you want to edit<br />

the instruction file. If you reply Yes, the Configuration application displays an edit<br />

window containing the current contents of the instruction file.<br />

Follow these guidelines when editing text in an instruction file:<br />

• When you enter text, an insertion point (a flashing vertical bar) indicates where the<br />

text will appear.<br />

• Use the arrow keys to move the insertion point. Press the Enter key to start a new<br />

line of text.<br />

7–12 7833 4778–008


Changing Component Class Characteristics<br />

• Press the Delete key to delete the character ahead of the insertion point or the<br />

Backspace key to delete the character behind the insertion point.<br />

• You can copy text from any open window on your screen using Ctrl-C, move the<br />

mouse pointer to the desired location in the edit window, click to move the insertion<br />

point to that location, and press Ctrl-V to paste the selected text in the edit window.<br />

When you are done editing the file, click File in the Edit window and then Exit to close<br />

the window. The Configuration application asks whether you want to save the changes.<br />

Note: If you prefer, you can use any text editor to edit an instruction file outside of the<br />

Configuration application. These files reside in folder sp-data-folder\status\instructions.<br />

7.3.12. Specifying Retention of Note Files<br />

As described in 1.2 and 4.2, a user of <strong>Status</strong> can create a note file for any component<br />

monitored by <strong>Status</strong>. When a component is deleted in <strong>Status</strong>, you might want its note<br />

file deleted automatically, or you might want it retained in case another component is<br />

later created with the same name, host, and class. Click a value in the Retain Notes?<br />

column to specify this behavior for all components of a component class.<br />

This feature applies to components that are deleted either by explicit user action (see 3.4<br />

and 4.2), or by a DE event report received by <strong>Status</strong>. Notes for components that still<br />

exist when <strong>Status</strong> terminates are retained regardless of which value you select for Retain<br />

Notes?.<br />

7.3.13. Specifying Alarm Text<br />

The alarm text of a component class is displayed in the Configuration Alarms window of<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console when an attribute of a component in this class attains<br />

an alarm-level unexpected value.<br />

You can edit the alarm text for a component class by clicking the value in the Alarm Text<br />

column. The Configuration application displays a dialog window in which you can enter<br />

the alarm text. If you do not want <strong>Status</strong> to raise any alarms for components in this<br />

class, select Unknown instead.<br />

The alarm text can include the following substitution strings. Each substitution string<br />

must start with a backslash and an underline, be specified with uppercase letters, and<br />

end with a backslash.<br />

\_NAME\ The name of the component to which the alarm condition applies.<br />

\_CLASS\ The class of the component.<br />

\_HOSTID\ The host system containing the component.<br />

\_ATTRIBUTE\ The name of the attribute that caused the alarm condition.<br />

\_VALUE\ The value of the attribute that caused the alarm condition.<br />

\_MESSAGE\ The value of the Message attribute for the component.<br />

\_TIME\ The value of the Event Report Time attribute for the component.<br />

7833 4778–008 7–13


Changing Component Class Characteristics<br />

\_XXX\ The value of the site-defined attribute named XXX. You must specify<br />

XXX with all uppercase letters, regardless of the case you used in the<br />

actual name. If the actual name you specified contains a newline, tab,<br />

or multiple consecutive spaces, you must replace these with a single<br />

space in the substitution string.<br />

Example<br />

By default, the alarm text for each component class is<br />

\_CLASS\ \_NAME\ on \_HOSTID\ has \_ATTRIBUTE\ = \_VALUE\<br />

You define a component class named Tape with this alarm text to monitor tape drives.<br />

For this class, you define a status attribute named “<strong>Status</strong>,” and specify down as an<br />

alarm value for this attribute. In Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>, a tape drive named<br />

DriveA is monitored on system Host1. If Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> receives an<br />

event report from DriveA setting its <strong>Status</strong> to down, Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

raises an alarm. The text of this alarm is as follows:<br />

Tape DriveA on Host1 has <strong>Status</strong> = down<br />

7–14 7833 4778–008


Adding and Deleting Component Classes<br />

7.4. Adding and Deleting Component Classes<br />

The following subsection provides information about<br />

• Adding a component class<br />

• Copying a component class<br />

• Merging classifications<br />

• Deleting classes<br />

7.4.1. Adding a New Component Class<br />

Use the following procedure to add a class to the current classification:<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window.<br />

2. Click Add Classes. A dialog window requesting the names of the new classes<br />

appears.<br />

3. Move your pointer to the text input line and type in the new class names. To enter<br />

multiple class names, press the Enter key after each name. Each name must match<br />

exactly the class name used in attribute-change (AC) and delete-object (DE) event<br />

reports; however, the name is not case sensitive.<br />

4. When the names are correct, click OK. The dialog window closes and the Define<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Classification window is dynamically updated to include the new component<br />

classes in alphabetical order.<br />

5. The characteristics of these new classes are given default values; edit them as<br />

described in 7.3 and 7.5.<br />

Note: You must supply a value for the System Types characteristic after you add the<br />

class, or the class will never be populated.<br />

7.4.2. Copying a Component Class<br />

Use the following procedure to add a class to the current classification by copying the<br />

definition of another class in the classification:<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window.<br />

2. Click Copy Class. A dialog window requesting the name of the new class appears.<br />

3. Type in the new class name, and then click OK. A second dialog window listing all<br />

classes in the classification appears.<br />

4. Double-click the class you want to copy. The dialog window closes and the new<br />

class is inserted into the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window in alphabetical order.<br />

5. Edit the characteristics of the new class as described in 7.3 and 7.5.<br />

7833 4778–008 7–15


Adding and Deleting Component Classes<br />

7.4.3. Merging Classifications<br />

Use the following procedure to copy all component classes from another classification<br />

into the current classification. This procedure can be useful if you have developed two<br />

separate applications using <strong>Status</strong>, and you want to combine them.<br />

1. Click File in the menu bar of the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window.<br />

2. Click Merge Classification. A dialog window listing all other classifications appears.<br />

3. Double-click the classification whose component classes you want to copy. The<br />

dialog window and the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window close. After a few<br />

seconds, the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window reappears with the copied<br />

component classes inserted in alphabetical order.<br />

If the selected classification contains classes with the same names as those in the<br />

current classification, those classes are not copied, and a message stating this is<br />

displayed. Similarly, if the selected classification contains classes with the same Internal<br />

Class (except GENERAL) as the current classification, those classes are not copied, and a<br />

message stating this is displayed.<br />

7.4.4. Deleting Component Classes<br />

Use the following procedure to delete classes from the current classification:<br />

1. Click Edit in the menu bar of the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window.<br />

2. Click Delete Classes. A dialog window listing all component classes in the<br />

classification appears.<br />

3. Click the names of the classes you want to delete.<br />

4. After you have selected the classes you want to delete, click OK. The window<br />

closes and the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window is dynamically updated.<br />

7–16 7833 4778–008


7.5. Configuring Site-Defined Attributes<br />

Configuring Site-Defined Attributes<br />

This subsection provides information on configuring the following types of attributes:<br />

• <strong>Status</strong><br />

• Numeric<br />

• String<br />

7.5.1. Configuring <strong>Status</strong> Attributes<br />

You can define up to eight status attributes for each component class. The first status<br />

attribute has the default name of “<strong>Status</strong>,” but you can change this name.<br />

To define status attributes, click the Edit menu, click Configure Site-Defined <strong>Status</strong><br />

Attributes, and then click the number of the attribute you want to define. A table<br />

appears with the following columns:<br />

Attribute name<br />

The name of the attribute. This name must match the attribute name used in<br />

attribute-change event reports sent to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>; however, the<br />

name is not case sensitive. The name can span multiple lines and is displayed as<br />

such in the <strong>Status</strong> displays. In event reports, replace any newline characters in the<br />

name with spaces.<br />

If you do not specify a name (Unknown), the attribute is not defined for the<br />

component class, regardless of other values that you have specified for the attribute.<br />

Do not specify any of the following as attribute names:<br />

• APPL<br />

• APPLQUAL<br />

• SENDER_TIME<br />

• SERVER_TIME<br />

Possible values<br />

A list of all possible values for this attribute. Click these values in the table to add to<br />

them, to delete from them, or to alter them. If you add more values, press the Enter<br />

key after each value. These values are case sensitive. Click OK or Cancel to close<br />

this dialog window.<br />

After you specify the possible values for this attribute, group them into three sets:<br />

expected values, attention values, and alarm values. Do this by selecting the<br />

expected and alarm values using the next two columns. Attention values are the<br />

possible values you do not select as either expected or alarm values.<br />

Expected values<br />

The list of attribute values that do not cause an attention or alarm exception. When a<br />

component is created automatically by <strong>Status</strong>, it assumes the expected values you<br />

specify here. Click these values to select additional ones, or to remove values you<br />

7833 4778–008 7–17


Configuring Site-Defined Attributes<br />

previously selected. You can choose from all the possible values you specified in the<br />

Possible Values column, except any you have already selected as alarm values.<br />

You can also select hyphen (-) as an expected value. The hyphen represents the<br />

value of the attribute before any event report has set its value. If you select this as<br />

an expected value, then the operator's attention will not be drawn to this attribute<br />

prior to it receiving a value.<br />

If you select Unknown as the expected value, when a component of this class is<br />

created, <strong>Status</strong> sets its only expected value to the first nonalarm value it receives for<br />

the component.<br />

The expected values you specify are defaults for the component class. To change<br />

the expected values, see 4.3.1 and 6.1.6.<br />

Alarm values<br />

The list of values that cause an alarm exception in <strong>Status</strong>. When a component is<br />

created automatically by <strong>Status</strong>, it assumes the alarm values you specify here. Click<br />

these values to select additional ones, or to remove values you previously selected.<br />

You can choose from all the possible values you specified in the Possible Values<br />

column, except any you have already selected as expected values.<br />

You can also select hyphen (-) as an alarm value. The hyphen represents the value of<br />

the attribute before any event report has set its value. If you select this as an alarm<br />

value, then <strong>Status</strong> will raise an alarm for this attribute until it receives a value.<br />

If you select Unknown as the alarm value, no value of this attribute causes an alarm<br />

exception for components of this class.<br />

The alarm values you specify are defaults for the component class. To change the<br />

alarm values, see 4.3.1 and 6.1.6.<br />

Alarm Id<br />

You can use the Alarm Id to identify an alarm raised by <strong>Status</strong> in external alarm<br />

actions, or to associate the alarm with help text. The default Alarm Id is the<br />

component class name and the attribute name separated by a period. If you select<br />

Unknown for the Alarm Id, <strong>Status</strong> does not raise an alarm when this attribute attains<br />

an alarm value.<br />

The Alarm Id is used only if you also specified Alarm Text for this component class.<br />

(See 7.3.)<br />

If the Alarm Id matches the name of an action list in the active alarm policy, then<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> will perform the appropriate alarm actions from that action<br />

list whenever this alarm is raised, acknowledged, or cleared. If the Alarm Id matches<br />

the name of a file in the help folder, then the text in this file will be included in the<br />

Alarm Detail window displayed for this alarm by Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

The Alarm Id can be a literal string, or it can contain one or more of the following<br />

substitution strings. When <strong>Status</strong> raises an alarm for this attribute, it replaces each<br />

substitution string with the indicated text. Each substitution string must start with a<br />

7–18 7833 4778–008


Configuring Site-Defined Attributes<br />

backslash and an underline, be specified in all uppercase letters, and end with a<br />

backslash.<br />

\_NAME\ The name of the component to which the alarm<br />

condition applies<br />

\_HOSTID\ The host system containing the component<br />

\_VALUE\ The value of the attribute that caused the alarm<br />

condition<br />

Severity<br />

The severity of any alarm raised by <strong>Status</strong> for this attribute, when the attribute<br />

attains an alarm value. The default is major. This value is applicable only if you have<br />

specified alarm text for the component class, and an alarm-id for this attribute.<br />

Timeout<br />

If Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> does not receive for the duration of the timeout<br />

period an event report that sets this attribute for a component of this class, the<br />

attribute is set to the default value. If you want to use this feature, you must provide<br />

values in both the Timeout and Default columns. The Timeout value is expressed in<br />

seconds.<br />

Default<br />

If Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> has not received an event report for a component<br />

of this class for the duration of the Timeout period, the attribute for that component<br />

is set to this default value. Click this value to select a different default. You can<br />

choose as the default any of the values you specified as possible values, or you can<br />

choose hyphen (-), which causes the attribute value to be reset to the unreported<br />

state. The value you select as the default can be an expected value, an attention<br />

value, or an alarm value.<br />

Configure status attributes for component classes according to the requirements of your<br />

site. A status attribute's name and values must match the attribute-value pairs in event<br />

reports received by Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>. The attribute name is case<br />

insensitive; attribute values are case sensitive. For further information about site-defined<br />

status attributes, see 4.3. For information about specifying event reports, see the Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

7.5.2. Configuring Numeric Attributes<br />

Each component class can include up to eight configured site-defined numeric attributes.<br />

To configure a site-defined numeric attribute, click Edit in the menu bar, then Configure<br />

Site-Defined Numeric Attributes, and then the number of the attribute you want to<br />

define. The selected Configure Site-Defined Numeric Attribute table opens. The table<br />

contains the following columns:<br />

Attribute Name<br />

The name of the numeric attribute. This attribute name must match the attribute<br />

name used in attribute-change event reports sent to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>,<br />

except that the name is not case sensitive. The name can span multiple lines and is<br />

7833 4778–008 7–19


Configuring Site-Defined Attributes<br />

displayed as such in the <strong>Status</strong> displays. In event reports which set a value to this<br />

attribute, replace any newline characters in the name with spaces.<br />

If you do not specify an attribute name, then the attribute is not defined for the<br />

component class, regardless of other values that you have specified for the attribute.<br />

Do not specify any of the following as attribute names:<br />

• APPL<br />

• APPLQUAL<br />

• SENDER_TIME<br />

• SERVER_TIME<br />

Default Alarm Minimum<br />

The lowest value that does not cause an alarm exception. Any value less than this<br />

number is considered an alarm value.<br />

Default Attention Minimum<br />

The lowest value that does not cause an attention exception. Any value less than<br />

this number is considered an unexpected value.<br />

Default Attention Maximum<br />

The highest value that does not cause an attention exception. Any value greater than<br />

this number is considered an unexpected value.<br />

Default Alarm Maximum<br />

The highest value that does not cause an alarm exception. Any value greater than<br />

this number is considered an alarm value.<br />

Unreported Value<br />

This characteristic determines how <strong>Status</strong> will treat this numeric attribute in each<br />

component of this class, before any event report assigns a value to the attribute. The<br />

possible values are<br />

normal An unreported value does not cause an attention or alarm condition.<br />

This is the default.<br />

attention An unreported value is treated as an attention condition, just as if the<br />

value fell outside the attention thresholds but inside the alarm<br />

thresholds.<br />

alarm An unreported value is treated as an alarm condition, just as if the<br />

value fell outside the alarm thresholds.<br />

Alarm Id<br />

You can use the Alarm Id to identify an alarm raised by <strong>Status</strong> in external alarm<br />

actions, or to associate the alarm with help text. The default Alarm Id is the<br />

component name and the attribute name separated by a period. If you select<br />

Unknown for the Alarm Id, <strong>Status</strong> does not raise an alarm when this attribute attains<br />

an alarm value.<br />

7–20 7833 4778–008


Configuring Site-Defined Attributes<br />

The Alarm Id is used only if you also specified Alarm Text for this component class.<br />

(See 7.3.)<br />

If the Alarm Id matches the name of an action list in the active alarm policy, then<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> will perform the appropriate alarm actions from that action<br />

list whenever this alarm is raised, acknowledged, or cleared. If the Alarm Id matches<br />

the name of a file in the help folder, then the text in this file will be included in the<br />

Alarm Detail window displayed for this alarm by Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

The Alarm Id can be a literal string, or it can contain one or more of the following<br />

substitution strings. When <strong>Status</strong> raises an alarm for this attribute, it replaces each<br />

substitution string with the indicated text. Each substitution string must start with a<br />

backslash and an underline, be specified in all uppercase letters, and end with a<br />

backslash.<br />

\_NAME\ The name of the component to which the alarm condition applies<br />

\_HOSTID\ The host system containing the component<br />

\_VALUE\ The value of the attribute that caused the alarm condition<br />

Severity<br />

The severity of any alarm raised by <strong>Status</strong> for this attribute, when the attribute<br />

attains an alarm value. The default is major. This value is applicable only if you have<br />

specified alarm text for the component class, and an alarm-id for this attribute.<br />

The Configuration application prevents you from specifying a value that is out of order.<br />

For example, you cannot specify an Attention Maximum value that is less than the<br />

Attention Minimum value or greater than the Alarm Maximum value.<br />

The minimum and maximum values you specify using the Configuration application are<br />

defaults for the component class. To change the threshold values, see 4.3.2 and 6.1.7.<br />

For further information about site-defined numeric attributes, see 4.3. For information<br />

about specifying event reports, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

7.5.3. Configuring String Attributes<br />

Each component class can include up to eight site-defined string attributes. To configure<br />

string attributes, click Edit in the menu bar and then click Configure Site-Defined String<br />

Attributes. The Configure Site-Defined String Attributes table opens.<br />

The Configure Site-Defined String Attributes table has the following columns:<br />

First String Attribute Name<br />

The name of the first site-defined string attribute. This name must match the<br />

attribute name used in attribute-change event reports sent to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

<strong>Status</strong>, except that the name is not case sensitive. The name can span multiple lines<br />

and is displayed as such in the <strong>Status</strong> displays. In event reports that set a value to<br />

this attribute, replace any newline characters in the name with spaces.<br />

7833 4778–008 7–21


Configuring Site-Defined Attributes<br />

Do not specify any of the following as attribute names:<br />

• APPL<br />

• APPLQUAL<br />

• SENDER_TIME<br />

• SERVER_TIME<br />

Associated Attr<br />

This attribute determines how the first string attribute is highlighted in <strong>Status</strong><br />

displays. By default, <strong>Status</strong> displays the string attribute value in component tables<br />

and attribute lists without any highlighting. However, you can select one of the<br />

status or numeric attributes that you defined for the class to control the highlighting<br />

of this string attribute.<br />

If you select one of these, the value of the string attribute is always displayed by<br />

<strong>Status</strong> with the same highlighting as the selected attribute. Click the value in this<br />

column and select one of the possible attributes to associate with the first string<br />

attribute, or select Unknown to disable this feature. The possible attributes are the<br />

names of site-defined status and numeric attributes you previously specified.<br />

The rest of the columns in this table supply similar information for the remaining sitedefined<br />

string attributes.<br />

For further information about site-defined string attributes, see 4.3. For information<br />

about specifying event reports, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

7–22 7833 4778–008


7.6. Additional Specifications<br />

7.6.1. Editing a Single Class<br />

Additional Specifications<br />

You might find it easier to edit all information for one component class from a single<br />

window. The Configuration application provides a form that lets you view and edit all<br />

characteristics that apply to a single component class.<br />

To edit a single class, click the Edit menu, and then click Edit Single Class. A dialog<br />

window opens presenting the names of all defined classes. Select a class to edit. The<br />

list of characteristics for that class appears.<br />

An alternative way to open the list of characteristics for a class is to click the name of the<br />

class in the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification table. A pop-up menu appears. Click Edit Class<br />

in this menu.<br />

After you have opened the list of characteristics for a component class, click the name of<br />

any characteristic in this list to change its value.<br />

7.6.2. Controlling Duplicate Alarm Behavior<br />

If you are running multiple instances of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> and monitoring<br />

the same component from each, each instance of <strong>Status</strong> issues its own alarm for that<br />

component. (The component is identified by its host, class, and component name.)<br />

By default, these alarms are considered duplicate alarms and only one alarm appears in<br />

the Configuration Alarms window of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. You can control<br />

duplicate alarm behavior and choose to have the same alarm appear multiple times in the<br />

Configuration Alarms window.<br />

If you choose the default behavior of having these alarms considered duplicates and any<br />

instance of <strong>Status</strong> clears an alarm, it is removed from the Configuration Alarms window.<br />

Therefore if two instances of <strong>Status</strong> raise an alarm and one is terminated, the alarm is<br />

cleared even though the other instance of <strong>Status</strong> is still running and has not cleared the<br />

alarm.<br />

To control duplicate alarm behavior<br />

1. Click the Edit menu in the Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification table.<br />

2. Click Select Behavior For Duplicate Alarms.<br />

3. A dialog box asks you to select the desired behavior for duplicate alarms.<br />

7833 4778–008 7–23


Additional Specifications<br />

7–24 7833 4778–008


Appendix A<br />

Troubleshooting<br />

This appendix explains how to<br />

• Use the event report logging capabilities of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

• Use the Unreported Components table to detect potential problems<br />

• Report problems to <strong>Unisys</strong><br />

7833 4778–008 A–1


Event Report Logging<br />

A.1. Event Report Logging<br />

The event reports received by Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> are crucial to its correct<br />

operation. Event reports specify attribute changes for monitored components. Some<br />

event reports are created by SMART AMS, CP-AMS, and SP-AMS databases as a result<br />

of specified message actions. SMART AMS runs on OS 2200 consoles, and CP-AMS<br />

and SP-AMS run on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. Other sources of event reports<br />

are the URM agent, and client applications, which send event reports by using the<br />

spo_event command or the Event Server API.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> provides a facility for logging the event reports that it receives and processes.<br />

This enables you to verify that the event reports sent by various sources do what you<br />

expect.<br />

For further information about event reports, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

A.1.1. Trace Levels<br />

Logging of event reports by <strong>Status</strong> is controlled through the item Select Trace Level in<br />

the File menu of the <strong>Status</strong> diagram, as described in 2.5. Click this menu item to choose<br />

one of three levels of tracing:<br />

• None<br />

No logging of event reports is done. This is always the initial value when you start<br />

<strong>Status</strong>. (To enable logging during initialization of a classification or configuration, first<br />

change the trace level and then select the configuration or classification whose<br />

initialization you want to monitor.)<br />

• Partial<br />

Event reports that <strong>Status</strong> could not process completely are logged. One or more<br />

explanations of the cause follow each event report. Note that an event report that<br />

could not be processed completely by <strong>Status</strong> is not necessarily an error. In some<br />

cases, one instance of <strong>Status</strong> might receive event reports that apply to another<br />

instance of <strong>Status</strong> (running a different classification, for example) or to another<br />

process entirely. When you analyze the log of event reports, you must decide which<br />

unprocessed event reports represent errors and which represent anticipated<br />

situations.<br />

• Full<br />

All event reports received by <strong>Status</strong> are logged. The message type field in the log<br />

distinguishes event reports that were processed completely from event reports that<br />

were not processed completely. As with a trace level of Partial, the event reports<br />

that <strong>Status</strong> could not process completely are followed by one or more explanations.<br />

A.1.2. SP-STATUS Log<br />

<strong>Status</strong> writes its trace information to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> log named SP-STATUS.<br />

This log can be selected and viewed by using the Log Viewer, just like any other log<br />

A–2 7833 4778–008


Event Report Logging<br />

produced by Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>. For further information about using the Log<br />

Viewer, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

A.1.3. Log Message Information<br />

Each log message <strong>Status</strong> writes to the log SP-STATUS includes the following<br />

information:<br />

• The source of the message, which is always STATUS.<br />

• A message type code, explained in the following subsection.<br />

• The time the event report was received by <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

• An application qualifier (APPLQUAL), which is the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

workstation name and the process-id (pid) of the instance of <strong>Status</strong> that added the<br />

message to the log. This information is important only if you have multiple instances<br />

of <strong>Status</strong>, each with event report tracing turned on simultaneously (which is not<br />

recommended).<br />

• The text of the log message. This text is either a copy of an event report received by<br />

<strong>Status</strong> or an information message. Messages that echo event reports are preceded<br />

by the name of the host from which the event report came. Event reports from<br />

SMART AMS and CP-AMS are also preceded by the name of the OS 2200 console<br />

that generated the event report.<br />

A.1.4. Message Type Codes<br />

The log SP-STATUS contains log entries with three different message type codes:<br />

EN This code indicates an environment change in <strong>Status</strong>. These log messages are<br />

added to the log every time you select a different trace level, configuration, or<br />

classification in <strong>Status</strong>. These messages enable you to track environment changes<br />

that affect how event reports are processed and what appears in the log.<br />

EX This code flags an event report for which <strong>Status</strong> detected one or more exceptions<br />

that prevented the complete processing of the event report. This code also flags<br />

the information messages that follow such an event report and explain why the<br />

event report was not completely processed.<br />

NO This code flags event reports that <strong>Status</strong> was able to process completely and<br />

normally. These event reports appear in the log only when you set the trace level<br />

to Full.<br />

A.1.5. Exception Conditions<br />

<strong>Status</strong> flags the following conditions as exceptions in the log SP-STATUS. Unless<br />

otherwise stated, the entire event report is discarded when one of these exceptions is<br />

detected.<br />

• Inappropriate event report type. <strong>Status</strong> can process only event reports with<br />

TYPE=AC (attribute change) or TYPE=DE (delete object).<br />

• The component class specified in the event report either does not exist in the<br />

classification currently being used by <strong>Status</strong>, or this class exists but has a Creation<br />

7833 4778–008 A–3


Event Report Logging<br />

Scheme equal to none. Remember that class names specified in event reports are<br />

not case sensitive. (See 7.3.)<br />

• The component class and host specified in the event report are not compatible.<br />

When the component class was defined using the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Configuration application, the System Types specified for the component class did<br />

not include the system type of the host to which the event report refers. (See 7.3.)<br />

• A component with the name (instance) specified in the event report does not exist<br />

for the class and host to which the event report applies. For AC event reports, this<br />

exception can occur only if the Creation Scheme for the class is “explicit_only.” This<br />

means that automatic creation of components is not done for that class. Remember<br />

that the component name (instance) specified in an event report is case sensitive.<br />

• An attribute name included in the event report (on the left side of the equal sign) is<br />

not defined in the class to which the event report applies. In this case, the attribute<br />

is ignored, but the rest of the event report is processed normally. Note that attribute<br />

names are not case sensitive.<br />

• An attribute value specified in the event report (on the right side of the equal sign) is<br />

not legal for the attribute to which it applies. A value for a status attribute is<br />

considered illegal if it is not one of those listed as a possible value for the attribute<br />

when the class was defined. (See 7.5.) It is also illegal if a noninteger value is<br />

specified for a numeric attribute. In these cases, <strong>Status</strong> sets the attribute to<br />

unknown and processes the rest of the event report normally. Remember that<br />

attribute values are case sensitive.<br />

• An event report with TYPE=DE has attributes in addition to TYPE, CLASS,<br />

INSTANCE, and HOST. In this case, <strong>Status</strong> processes the event report (that is, the<br />

component is deleted), and ignores the extraneous attributes.<br />

Note that the log SP-STATUS does not contain event reports with errors that were<br />

detected by SMART AMS, CP-AMS, or SP-AMS, since these event reports are never<br />

sent. For event report errors detected by SMART AMS and CP-AMS, you can examine<br />

the log for the appropriate host. For event report errors detected by SP-AMS, you can<br />

examine either the appropriate host log or the log SP-AMS.<br />

A–4 7833 4778–008


A.2. Unreported Components Table<br />

Unreported Components Table<br />

The Unreported Components table is one of the component tables available in <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

This table contains only components that were created by <strong>Status</strong> and for which no event<br />

reports were received since you selected the current configuration and classification. For<br />

detailed information about the Unreported Components table, see 3.4.<br />

Typically, the components in the Unreported Components table either were created<br />

explicitly during the current session of <strong>Status</strong> (see 6.1), or were brought in as part of a<br />

component set that you retrieved (see 2.4 and 6.4). The presence of a component in this<br />

table does not necessarily indicate an error. However, you can examine this table to see<br />

components for which <strong>Status</strong> has received no information (event report). Absence of<br />

such information can indicate a problem in the SMART AMS, CP-AMS, or SP-AMS<br />

database, or in another agent that generates the event reports.<br />

Another possible cause for a component in this table is a problem in the connection<br />

between the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server and the host or OS 2200 console that<br />

contains the component. Absence of an event report can also indicate that the<br />

component was given an incorrect name when it was explicitly created. Remember that<br />

component names are not case sensitive.<br />

7833 4778–008 A–5


Reporting Problems<br />

A.3. Reporting Problems<br />

When you have problems using this product or need further assistance, call a <strong>Unisys</strong><br />

<strong>Support</strong> Center:<br />

• In the United States and Canada, the number to call for support is 1-800-328-0440.<br />

Call between 8:00 a.m. and 8:00 p.m., Eastern Time, Monday through Friday,<br />

excluding holidays.<br />

• Outside the United States, call the <strong>Unisys</strong> <strong>Support</strong> Center number provided by your<br />

sales representative.<br />

When you report a problem to the <strong>Unisys</strong> <strong>Support</strong> Center, describe what is happening as<br />

best you can. Include any pertinent information such as your Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

server hardware and software levels, any unusual circumstances before encountering<br />

the problem, and any actions you have taken to resolve the problem.<br />

Contact your site administrator, if you have one, for all software problems before calling<br />

the <strong>Unisys</strong> <strong>Support</strong> Center.<br />

A–6 7833 4778–008


Appendix B<br />

Tape Monitor for OS 2200 Hosts [OS<br />

2200]<br />

This appendix describes the Tape Monitor for OS 2200 hosts, which is a specific use of<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> provided with all editions of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>. The<br />

OS 2200 Tape Monitor provides status information about the OS 2200 host and tape<br />

component classes. For status information about other component classes, your site<br />

must purchase and install the Department or Enterprise Edition of Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

Follow the guidelines in this appendix when using this application. Study this application<br />

as an example before developing applications of your own.<br />

7833 4778–008 B–1


Tape Monitor Features<br />

B.1. Tape Monitor Features<br />

The OS 2200 Tape Monitor includes the following:<br />

• A classification definition called TapeMonx.y.z, which defines the component classes<br />

required by the application. For detailed information about the classification<br />

TapeMonx.y.z, where x.y.z is the release level of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>, see B.2.<br />

• Component group table templates, which include the columns you typically need to<br />

view to monitor tape load requests.<br />

• The SMART AMS or CP-AMS database patterns needed to match the load, service,<br />

and other console messages involved in tape loading. The actions associated with<br />

these patterns are event reports specific to the component classes 2200_Host and<br />

Tape. These patterns are contained in file tapmon22.bld in<br />

sp-data-folder\os2200-ams on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. You must include<br />

these patterns in the active SMART AMS or CP-AMS database of the OS 2200<br />

system console of each host with tape drives you want to monitor.<br />

B.1.1. Capabilities<br />

The OS 2200 Tape Monitor application enables you to<br />

• Display a component table that shows all tape drives that are not operational or that<br />

require a cartridge to be loaded.<br />

• Define component groups so that tape drives are organized into groups based on the<br />

hosts to which they are connected, their physical locations in the computer room, or<br />

some other site-specific criteria. For each group, you can display a different table<br />

identifying the units in the group that require service.<br />

• Change the definition of the component classes and SMART AMS or CP-AMS<br />

database patterns to reflect local terminology or to capture additional information<br />

from load, service, and other tape-related console messages.<br />

B.1.2. Accessing the Tape Monitor Application<br />

To access the OS 2200 Tape Monitor application, select the classification TapeMonx.y.z<br />

when you start <strong>Status</strong>. <strong>Status</strong> provides a default diagram for use with the OS 2200 Tape<br />

Monitor. You can select the default diagram or you can define your own diagrams. For<br />

further information about diagram definitions, see Section 5.<br />

You may want to combine the OS 2200 Tape Monitor application with other applications<br />

for <strong>Status</strong> that your site develops. You can do this by adding the patterns in the SMART<br />

AMS or CP-AMS database tapmon22 to your own SMART AMS or CP-AMS database,<br />

and by merging the classification TapeMonx.y.z with your own classification, as<br />

described in 7.4.<br />

B–2 7833 4778–008


B.2. TapeMon Classification [OS 2200]<br />

TapeMon Classification [OS 2200]<br />

This subsection provides a detailed description of the classification TapeMonx.y.z<br />

supplied by <strong>Unisys</strong> as part of the Basic Edition of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>. As supplied,<br />

this classification works in conjunction with the SMART AMS or CP-AMS database<br />

tapmon22, which is located in sp-data-folder\os2200-ams on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

server. Your site can alter both the classification TapeMonx.y.z and the database<br />

tapmon22 to suit your specific needs as long as complementary changes are made to<br />

each.<br />

For information on modifying classifications, see Section 7. For information on modifying<br />

AMS databases, see the SMART Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

The classification TapeMonx.y.z contains the classes Tape and 2200_Host. The class<br />

Tape is used to monitor tape drives on OS 2200 hosts, and the class 2200_host is used<br />

to monitor OS 2200 hosts.<br />

B.2.1. Tape Class Characteristics<br />

The class Tape has the following characteristics:<br />

• Internal Class = GENERAL. This is used for all classes except those used to monitor<br />

host systems and system consoles.<br />

• System Types = OS 2200. This indicates that components in this class apply only to<br />

OS 2200 Series hosts.<br />

• Creation Scheme = automatic. This implies that <strong>Status</strong> automatically creates a<br />

component in this class if it receives an event report for a component in the class<br />

that it was not monitoring previously.<br />

• Init Mnemonic = tape. This causes <strong>Status</strong> to request that the OS 2200 data<br />

collector, which is part of the OMKEY background run, retrieve information for all<br />

tape drives when it establishes connection with each OS 2200 host.<br />

• Default Scope = Host. This implies that components in this class are, by default, not<br />

shared across different hosts.<br />

• Icon = tape_lg. This is the pixmap icon family tape_lg.png supplied with <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

• Instruction File is unspecified. These files contain site-specific operator instructions<br />

and are, therefore, not supplied by <strong>Unisys</strong>.<br />

• Alarm Text = “\_CLASS\ \_NAME\ on \_HOSTID\ has \_ATTRIBUTE\ = \_VALUE\.”<br />

This causes <strong>Status</strong> to raise an alarm whenever an attribute of a tape component<br />

attains an alarm value. The alarm appears in the Configuration Alarms window of<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. In the alarm text, the strings enclosed by<br />

backslashes are replaced by the appropriate values for the tape drive causing the<br />

alarm.<br />

• The class Tape has three site-defined status attributes: <strong>Status</strong>, Load, and<br />

Aux_Condition.<br />

The attribute <strong>Status</strong> for the class Tape has the following values defined: UP, DOWN,<br />

RESERVED, SUSPENDED, and NOT_AVAILABLE. The default expected value for<br />

7833 4778–008 B–3


TapeMon Classification [OS 2200]<br />

this attribute is not specified (unknown). This causes the first actual <strong>Status</strong> value<br />

received in an event report to become the expected <strong>Status</strong> value for each tape drive.<br />

The first event report results from matching a message produced by the data<br />

collector, so the expected <strong>Status</strong> value for each component is the value reported by<br />

the data collector. Since none of the <strong>Status</strong> values is defined as an alarm value, all<br />

the remaining values are treated as attention values. The attribute <strong>Status</strong> has no<br />

timeout period or default value defined.<br />

The attribute Load is used to monitor whether or not a tape drive requires a reel or<br />

cartridge to be mounted. This attribute has the following possible values: no, yes,<br />

and service. Of these, no (indicating no outstanding load or service message) is the<br />

expected value, yes (indicating an outstanding load message) is the attention value,<br />

and service (indicating an outstanding service message) is the alarm value. The<br />

alarm-id associated with this attribute is Tape.Load, so <strong>Status</strong> raises an alarm with<br />

ALARMID = Tape.Load whenever this attribute attains a value of service. <strong>Status</strong><br />

clears the alarm when the attribute attains any value other than service. The timeout<br />

period for the attribute Load is 150 seconds, and the default value is no. The timeout<br />

period was chosen to be somewhat larger than the usual OS 2200 interval between<br />

load and service messages (120 seconds).<br />

The attribute Aux_Condition is used to report auxiliary conditions that can apply to a<br />

tape drive.<br />

This attribute has the following possible values:<br />

none No auxiliary condition is present.<br />

remove_ring A reel was mounted on the drive with a write ring, which must be<br />

removed.<br />

add_ring A reel was mounted on the drive without a write ring, but a write<br />

ring is required.<br />

wrong_reel The incorrect reel was mounted on the drive.<br />

supply_reelid There is an outstanding message requiring the operator to enter<br />

the identifier of the reel that was mounted on the drive.<br />

not_ready The tape drive is offline.<br />

Of these values, none is the expected value, and all others are attention values. The<br />

attention values are set as the result of specific error messages that are matched in<br />

the AMS database tapmon22. The attribute Aux_Condition has no default value or<br />

timeout period.<br />

• The class Tape has four site-defined string attributes: Equipment _Mnemonic,<br />

Reel_Id, Ring ?, and Runid.<br />

The string attribute Equipment_Mnemonic contains the equipment mnemonic for the<br />

tape drive, as supplied by the OS 2200 data collector.<br />

The string attribute Reel_Id contains the reel-id or cartridge-id extracted by the<br />

database tapmon22 from the most recent load or service message sent for the tape<br />

drive. The attribute Reel_Id is associated with the site-defined status attribute Load,<br />

so that the reel-id appears in all component tables and attribute lists with the same<br />

B–4 7833 4778–008


TapeMon Classification [OS 2200]<br />

color coding as the attribute Load. With this association, your site might decide not<br />

to display the attribute Load in tables where the attribute Reel_Id appears.<br />

The string attribute Ring ? indicates whether or not a write ring is required for the<br />

volume to be mounted on the tape drive. The AMS database tapmon22 extracts this<br />

information from the most recent load or service message sent for the tape drive.<br />

Note that this attribute name includes a space before the question mark.<br />

The string attribute Runid gives the run-id of the run that requested a volume to be<br />

mounted on the drive. The AMS database tapmon22 extracts this information from<br />

the most recent load or service message sent for the tape drive.<br />

• There are no site-defined numeric attributes defined for the class Tape.<br />

• The class Tape also includes the string attributes Message and Time, which are<br />

automatically included in all component classes. Your site can use these to include a<br />

text message and event report time with event reports sent to <strong>Status</strong>. The AMS<br />

database tapmon22 as supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> does not set either of<br />

these attributes.<br />

B.2.2. Host Class Characteristics<br />

The class 2200_Host has the following characteristics:<br />

• Internal Class = OS2200. This is used only for a class that monitors OS 2200 hosts.<br />

• System Types = OS 2200. This implies that components in this class apply only to<br />

OS 2200 hosts.<br />

• Creation Scheme = explicit_only. This implies that only OS 2200 hosts defined in the<br />

current configuration are monitored by <strong>Status</strong>. (This is the only value allowed for this<br />

class.)<br />

• Init Mnemonic = sys. This causes <strong>Status</strong> to request that the OS 2200 data collector<br />

retrieve configuration information about the host when it establishes connection with<br />

the host. This information includes the attributes Exec_Level, System_Type, and<br />

Site_Id. If your site is not interested in displaying any of this information, you can set<br />

Init Mnemonic to unknown for the class 2200_Host.<br />

• Default Scope = Host. This is because host components cannot be shared across<br />

different hosts.<br />

• Icon = 2200Host_lg. This is the pixmap icon family 2200Host_lg.png supplied with<br />

<strong>Status</strong>.<br />

• Instruction File is unspecified because these files contain site-specific operator<br />

instructions and are, therefore, not supplied by <strong>Unisys</strong>.<br />

• Alarm Text = “\_CLASS\ \_NAME\ on \_HOSTID\ has \_ATTRIBUTE\ = \_VALUE\.”<br />

This causes <strong>Status</strong> to send an alarm event to Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> whenever an<br />

attribute of a 2200_Host component attains an alarm value. The alarm event report<br />

causes an alarm to appear in the Configuration Alarms window of Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Console. In the alarm text, the strings enclosed by backslashes are<br />

replaced by the appropriate values for the host causing the alarm.<br />

7833 4778–008 B–5


TapeMon Classification [OS 2200]<br />

• The class 2200_Host has one site-defined status attribute named “<strong>Status</strong>.” This<br />

attribute has the possible values initializing, up, and down defined. The value<br />

initializing indicates that the host is up and that <strong>Status</strong> has an active connection to<br />

the host, but that continuous display messages are not being received from the host.<br />

The value up indicates that the host is up, that <strong>Status</strong> has an active connection to the<br />

host, and that continuous display messages are being received from the host. The<br />

value down indicates that <strong>Status</strong> does not have an active connection to the host<br />

(although the host itself might be running). When the attribute <strong>Status</strong> of an OS 2200<br />

host is down or initializing, the attribute values for the Tape components associated<br />

with that host are not current because <strong>Status</strong> is no longer receiving event reports for<br />

any of the components associated with that host.<br />

• Because the class 2200_Host is implemented using the internal class OS2200, the<br />

2200_Host class automatically includes the following additional attributes:<br />

Data_Collection, Connected_Consoles, Exec_Level, System_Type, and Site_Id.<br />

These are described in 4.4. For the purposes of the classification TapeMonx.y.z, only<br />

Data_Collection is important.<br />

• The attribute Data_Collection indicates the outcome of the data collection process for<br />

that host. The value of this attribute is set by <strong>Status</strong> based on information it<br />

maintains internally and information sent from the AMS database tapmon22. In<br />

particular, the values ready, in_progress, OMKEY_not_running, and completed are<br />

set as the result of actions in the tapmon22 database. You can usually see the<br />

values not_started, ready, initiated, and in_progress during initialization of the<br />

connection between <strong>Status</strong> and the host. These are attention values and should be<br />

present only for a short time. The value completed indicates either that the data<br />

collection process has completed successfully or that no component classes<br />

required initialization. The values OMKEY_not_running and errored are treated as<br />

alarm values. OMKEY_not_running indicates that the OMKEY background run was<br />

not started on the host; errored indicates that <strong>Status</strong> was not able to send the<br />

console keyin that initiates the data collector. When Data_Collection assumes one of<br />

the alarm values, <strong>Status</strong> raises an alarm with ALARMID = 2200_Host.DataCollection.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> clears the alarm when this attribute attains any non-alarm value.<br />

B.2.3. Diagrams and Component Sets<br />

No diagrams or component sets are supplied with the classification TapeMonx.y.z<br />

because these definitions also depend on the configuration being monitored, which your<br />

site must define. However, when <strong>Status</strong> is brought up with the classification<br />

TapeMonx.y.z, you can choose to have it create default component groups for each<br />

combination of host and component class. Because there are only two component<br />

classes, two of these groups are created for each OS 2200 host in the configuration you<br />

select.<br />

B.2.4. Component Group Table Templates<br />

Also supplied with <strong>Status</strong> are a small number of predefined Component Group table<br />

templates. Some of these templates, as their names indicate, are intended especially for<br />

use with the classification TapeMonx.y.z <strong>Status</strong> also creates a table template named for<br />

each of the two classes in this classification; each of these templates contains all of the<br />

site-defined attributes in the associated class. When you define customized diagrams in<br />

B–6 7833 4778–008


TapeMon Classification [OS 2200]<br />

<strong>Status</strong>, you can use the supplied table templates as they are, alter the supplied<br />

templates, or create your own templates.<br />

7833 4778–008 B–7


TapeMon Classification [OS 2200]<br />

B–8 7833 4778–008


Appendix C<br />

Tape Monitor for MCP Hosts [MCP]<br />

This appendix describes the MCP Tape Monitor, which is a specific use of Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>. The MCP Tape Monitor provides status information about the MCP<br />

host and tape component classes. MCP Tape Monitor is provided with Department and<br />

Enterprise Edition of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

Follow the guidelines in this appendix when using this application. Study this application<br />

as an example before developing applications of your own.<br />

7833 4778–008 C–1


Tape Monitor Features<br />

C.1. Tape Monitor Features<br />

The MCP Tape Monitor includes the following:<br />

• A classification definition called MCPTapeMonx.y.z, which defines the component<br />

classes required by the application. For detailed information about the classification<br />

MCPTapeMonx.y.z, where x.y.z is the release level of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>,<br />

see C.2.<br />

• Component group table templates, which include the columns you typically need to<br />

view to monitor tape load requests.<br />

• The Single Point Autoaction Message System (SP-AMS) database patterns needed to<br />

match the tape messages and other system messages involved in tape loading,<br />

which are sent by the MCP host agent. The actions associated with these patterns<br />

are event reports specific to the component classes MCP_Host and MCP_Tape.<br />

These patterns are contained in the text file MCPMon.bld in sp-data-folder\sp-ams on<br />

the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. You must include these patterns in the active<br />

SP-AMS database on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. Please read the comments<br />

in file MCPMon.bld for detailed information.<br />

C.1.1. Capabilities<br />

The MCP Tape Monitor application enables you to<br />

• Define component groups so that tape drives are organized into groups based on the<br />

hosts to which they are connected. For each group, the operator can display a<br />

different table identifying the units in the group that require service.<br />

• Change the definition of the tape component classes and SP-AMS database patterns<br />

to reflect local terminology or to capture additional information from other taperelated<br />

messages.<br />

C.1.2. Accessing the Tape Monitor Application<br />

To access the MCP Tape Monitor application, select the classification MCPTapeMonx.y.z<br />

when you start <strong>Status</strong>. <strong>Status</strong> provides a default diagram for use with the MCP Tape<br />

Monitor. You can select the default diagram or you can define your own diagrams. For<br />

further information about diagram definitions, see Section 5.<br />

You may want to combine the MCP Tape Monitor application with other applications for<br />

<strong>Status</strong> that your site develops. You can do this by adding the patterns in the SP-AMS<br />

database MCPMon to your own SP-AMS database, and by merging the classification<br />

MCPTapeMonx.y.z with your own classification, as described in 7.4.<br />

C–2 7833 4778–008


C.2. MCPTapeMon Classification<br />

MCPTapeMon Classification<br />

This subsection provides a detailed description of the classification MCPTapeMonx.y.z<br />

supplied by <strong>Unisys</strong> as part of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Department and Enterprise<br />

Editions. As supplied, this classification works in conjunction with the SP-AMS database<br />

MCPMon, which is also supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>. Your site can alter both<br />

the classification MCPTapeMonx.y.z and the database MCPMon to suit your specific<br />

needs, as long as you make complementary changes to each.<br />

For information on modifying classifications, see Section 7. For information on modifying<br />

SP-AMS databases, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Single Point Autoaction Message<br />

System Administration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

The classification MCPTapeMonx.y.z contains the classes MCP_Tape and MCP_Host.<br />

The class MCP_Tape is used to monitor tape drives on MCP hosts and the class<br />

MCP_host is used to monitor MCP hosts.<br />

C.2.1. MCP_Tape Class Characteristics<br />

The class MCP_Tape has the following characteristics:<br />

• Internal Class = GENERAL. This is used for all classes except those used to monitor<br />

host systems and system consoles.<br />

• System Types = MCP. This implies that components in this class apply only to MCP<br />

hosts.<br />

• Creation Scheme = automatic. This implies that <strong>Status</strong> automatically creates a<br />

component in this class when it receives an event report for a component in the<br />

class that it was not monitoring previously.<br />

• Init Mnemonic = tape. This causes <strong>Status</strong> to request that the MCP data collector,<br />

which is part of the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface for ClearPath MCP, retrieve<br />

information for all tape drives when it establishes connection with each MCP host.<br />

• Default Scope = Host. This implies that components in this class are not shared<br />

across different hosts.<br />

• Icon = tape_lg. This is the pixmap icon family tape_lg.png supplied with <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

• Instruction File is unspecified. These files contain site-specific operator instructions<br />

and are, therefore, not supplied by <strong>Unisys</strong>.<br />

• Alarm Text = “\_CLASS\ \_NAME\ on \_HOSTID\ has \_ATTRIBUTE\ = \_VALUE\.”<br />

This causes <strong>Status</strong> to raise an alarm whenever an attribute of an MCP_Tape<br />

component attains an alarm value. The alarm appears in the Configuration Alarms<br />

window of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. In the alarm text, the strings enclosed<br />

by backslashes are replaced by the appropriate values for the tape drive causing the<br />

alarm.<br />

• The class MCP_Tape has two site-defined status attributes: <strong>Status</strong> and<br />

Volume-Scratch.<br />

The attribute <strong>Status</strong> for the class MCP_Tape has the following possible values<br />

defined: ONLINE, OFFLINE, RESERVED, SAVED, READY, FREED and INUSE. The<br />

7833 4778–008 C–3


MCPTapeMon Classification<br />

default expected value for this attribute is not specified (unknown). This causes the<br />

first actual <strong>Status</strong> value received in an event report to become the only expected<br />

<strong>Status</strong> value for each component. The first event report results from matching a<br />

message produced by the MCP data collector, so the expected <strong>Status</strong> value for each<br />

component is the value reported by the data collector. Since none of the <strong>Status</strong><br />

values is defined as an alarm value, all the remaining values are treated as attention<br />

values. The attribute <strong>Status</strong> has no timeout period or default value defined.<br />

The attribute Volume-Scratch is used to indicate tapes that no longer have valid data<br />

(Purged). Possible values are Y, N, and blank. All of these are defined as expected<br />

values, so this attribute effectively acts as a string attribute.<br />

• The class MCP_Tape has four site-defined string attributes: Write-Enabled, Serial-<br />

Number, Tape-Name, and Tape-Density.<br />

The string attribute Write-Enabled shows whether the tape currently on this drive is<br />

write enabled. If no tape is mounted, this attribute is represented by a hyphen (-).<br />

The string attribute Serial-Number contains the reel or cartridge identifier for the tape<br />

currently mounted on this tape drive. If no tape is mounted, this attribute is<br />

represented by a hyphen (-).<br />

The string attribute Tape-Name displays the tape name for the tape currently<br />

mounted. If no tape is mounted, this attribute is represented by a hyphen (-).<br />

The string attribute Tape-Density indicates recording density of the tape currently<br />

mounted on this drive. If no tape is mounted, this attribute is represented by a<br />

hyphen (-).<br />

• There are no site-defined numeric attributes defined for the class MCP_Tape.<br />

• The class MCP_Tape also includes the string attributes Message and Time, which<br />

are automatically included in all component classes. Your site can use these to<br />

include a text message and event report time with event reports sent to <strong>Status</strong>. The<br />

SP-AMS database MCPMon, as supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>, does not set<br />

either of these attributes.<br />

C.2.2. Host Class Characteristics<br />

The class MCP_Host has the following characteristics:<br />

• Internal Class = MCP. This is used only for a class that monitors MCP hosts.<br />

• System Types = MCP. This implies that components in this class apply only to MCP<br />

hosts.<br />

• Creation Scheme = explicit_only. This implies that only MCP hosts defined in the<br />

current configuration are monitored by <strong>Status</strong>.<br />

• Init Mnemonic is unspecified, because the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface for<br />

ClearPath MCP does not report initialization information for the host system itself.<br />

• Default Scope = Host. This is because host components cannot be shared across<br />

different hosts.<br />

C–4 7833 4778–008


MCPTapeMon Classification<br />

• Icon = MCPHost_lg. This is the pixmap icon family MCPHost_lg.png supplied with<br />

<strong>Status</strong>.<br />

• Instruction File is unspecified because these files contain site-specific operator<br />

instructions and are, therefore, not supplied by <strong>Unisys</strong>.<br />

• Alarm Text = “\_CLASS\ \_NAME\ on \_HOSTID\ has \_ATTRIBUTE\ = \_VALUE\.”<br />

This causes <strong>Status</strong> to raise an alarm whenever an attribute of an MCP_Host<br />

component attains an alarm value. The alarm appears in the Configuration Alarms<br />

window of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console. In the alarm text, the strings enclosed<br />

by backslashes are replaced by the appropriate values for the host causing the alarm.<br />

• The class MCP_Host has one site-defined status attribute named “<strong>Status</strong>.” The<br />

<strong>Status</strong> attribute has the possible values active, inactive, timeout, busy, and<br />

unrecognized.<br />

Active Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> has successfully created a<br />

communications link to the system.<br />

Inactive Monitoring is off for the host system or the host system is down.<br />

Timeout No message traffic was sent within the time interval specified for<br />

the host in the configuration.<br />

Busy Two Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> servers are trying to connect to the<br />

same host. The host whose <strong>Status</strong> is busy is connected to<br />

another Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server.<br />

Unrecognized The network name specified for the host in the configuration does<br />

not appear in the hosts file or Domain Name Server on the Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> server.<br />

When the attribute <strong>Status</strong> of an MCP host is inactive, busy, or unrecognized, the<br />

attribute values for the tape components associated with that host are not current<br />

because <strong>Status</strong> is no longer receiving event reports for any of the components<br />

associated with that host.<br />

• Because the class MCP_Host is implemented using the internal class MCP, the class<br />

MCP_Host automatically includes the following additional attributes: Monitor,<br />

Connected_To_Application, Data_Collection, and Host_Agent_Active. These are<br />

described in 4.6. For the purposes of the classification MCPTapeMonx.y.z, only<br />

Data_Collection and Host_Agent_Active are important.<br />

• The attribute Data_Collection for a host indicates the outcome of the data collection<br />

process for that host. The value of this attribute is set by <strong>Status</strong> based on<br />

information it maintains internally and information sent from the SP-AMS database<br />

MCPMon.<br />

In particular, the values in_progress and completed are set as the result of actions in<br />

the database MCPMon. You can usually see the values not_started, initiated, and<br />

in_progress during initialization of the connection between <strong>Status</strong> and the host.<br />

These are attention values and should only be present for a short time. The value<br />

completed indicates either that the data collection process has completed<br />

successfully or that no component classes required initialization. The value errored is<br />

treated as an alarm value and indicates that <strong>Status</strong> was not able to send the<br />

command message that initiates the data collection process in the Single Point<br />

<strong>Operations</strong> Interface for ClearPath MCP. When Data_Collection assumes this value,<br />

7833 4778–008 C–5


MCPTapeMon Classification<br />

<strong>Status</strong> raises an alarm with ALARMID = MCP_Host.DataCollection. <strong>Status</strong> clears<br />

this alarm when the attribute attains any value other than errored.<br />

• The attribute Host_Agent_Active indicates whether the MCP agent has sent at least<br />

one utilization message to the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. <strong>Status</strong> uses this<br />

attribute to verify that the MCP agent is running and that a valid usercode/password<br />

was sent to the interface software from the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server. <strong>Status</strong><br />

does not initiate the data collection process until the value of Host_Agent_Active is<br />

yes. The active SP-AMS database on the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> server must<br />

contain a pattern that matches the utilization messages sent by the interface<br />

software and it must send an event report setting Host_Agent_Active to yes as a<br />

result. The database MCPMon contains a pattern that matches the utilization<br />

messages and starts the data collection process.<br />

C.2.3. Diagrams and Component Sets<br />

No diagrams or component sets are supplied with the classification MCPTapeMonx.y.z<br />

because they also depend on the configuration being monitored, which your site must<br />

define. However, when <strong>Status</strong> is brought up with the classification MCPTapeMonx.y.z,<br />

you can choose to have it create default component groups for each combination of host<br />

and component class. Because there are only two component classes, two of these<br />

groups are created for each MCP host in the configuration you select.<br />

C.2.4. Component Group Table Templates<br />

Also supplied with <strong>Status</strong> are a small number of predefined Component Group table<br />

templates. Some of these, as their names indicate, are intended especially for use with<br />

the classification MCPTapeMonx.y.z. <strong>Status</strong> also creates a table template named for<br />

each of the two classes in this classification; each of these templates contains all of the<br />

site-defined attributes in the associated class. When you define customized diagrams in<br />

<strong>Status</strong>, you can use the supplied table templates as they are, alter the supplied<br />

templates, or create your own templates.<br />

C–6 7833 4778–008


Appendix D<br />

UNIX Resource Monitor [UNIX]<br />

This appendix describes the UNIX Resource Monitor, which is a specific use of Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>. It is included with all editions of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

Follow the guidelines in this appendix when using this application.<br />

7833 4778–008 D–1


Using the UNIX Resource Monitor [UNIX]<br />

D.1. Using the UNIX Resource Monitor [UNIX]<br />

The UNIX Resource Monitor (URM) is a specific use of <strong>Status</strong>, which enables your site to<br />

monitor selected resources on UNIX systems monitored by Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

The UNIX Resource Monitor provides status information about components in the<br />

following component classes:<br />

• UNIX hosts<br />

• CPUs<br />

• File systems<br />

• Long-running processes<br />

• Critical processes<br />

• <strong>User</strong>s<br />

D.1.1. UNIX Resource Monitor Features<br />

The UNIX Resource Monitor includes the following:<br />

• A classification definition named UnixMonx.y.z, which defines the component<br />

classes monitored by the application. For detailed information about the classes and<br />

attributes associated with the classification UnixMonx.y.z, where x.y.z is the release<br />

level of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>, see D.2.<br />

• The URM agent, which is a set of shell scripts that must be installed on each<br />

managed UNIX system. For information on installing and configuring the URM agent<br />

on managed UNIX systems, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

D.1.2. Capabilities<br />

The UNIX Resource Monitor application enables you to define component groups so that<br />

monitored resources are organized into groups. For each group, the operator can display<br />

a different table identifying the units in the group that require service.<br />

D.1.3. Accessing the UNIX Resource Monitor<br />

To access the UNIX Resource Monitor, select the classification UnixMonx.y.z when you<br />

start <strong>Status</strong>. <strong>Status</strong> provides a default diagram for use with the UNIX Resource Monitor.<br />

You can select the default diagram or you can define your own diagrams. For further<br />

information about diagram definitions, see Section 5.<br />

You may want to combine the UNIX Resource Monitor with other applications for <strong>Status</strong><br />

that your site develops. You can do this by merging the classification UnixMonx.y.z with<br />

your own classification, as described in 7.4.<br />

This illustration shows the <strong>Status</strong> diagram for the classification UnixMonx.y.z.<br />

D–2 7833 4778–008


D.1.4. UnixMon Classification<br />

Using the UNIX Resource Monitor [UNIX]<br />

Figure D–1. UnixMon <strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

The classification UnixMonx.y.z supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> contains a set of<br />

component classes, each with predefined attributes. This classification has alarm<br />

generation turned on for all classes. This classification is described in D.2.<br />

Your site can modify the classification UnixMonx.y.z to suit your specific needs. For<br />

information on modifying classifications, see Section 7.<br />

7833 4778–008 D–3


UnixMon Classification [UNIX]<br />

D.2. UnixMon Classification [UNIX]<br />

This subsection describes the component classes and attributes defined in the<br />

classification UnixMonx.y.z. For information on customizing UnixMon classes and<br />

attributes, see Section 7.<br />

Data is supplied for each of the classes from each managed system on which your site<br />

has installed and enabled the URM agent, and for which the URM policy that controls the<br />

agent includes the class in its list of monitored classes.<br />

D.2.1. UNIX Host Class<br />

This class monitors each UNIX host system in the current configuration. There is one<br />

such component for each ANSI X3.64 system in the configuration (including hosts not<br />

running under UNIX and UNIX hosts on which the URM agent is not installed). This class<br />

corresponds with the internal class ANSI_X3_64, which implies that its attribute named<br />

<strong>Status</strong> reflects the network connection between Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> and the<br />

managed system, see 4.7.<br />

Attribute Description<br />

Name This string attribute reports the name of the UNIX host as named<br />

in the current configuration.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> This status attribute reflects the network connection between<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> and the managed system.<br />

Possible values include active, inactive, busy, unrecognized, and<br />

timeout. The expected value is active.<br />

Heartbeat <strong>Status</strong> This status attribute indicates if the UNIX host is still operational,<br />

and that the URM agent is still running on it. Possible values<br />

include active and timeout. The expected value is active, and the<br />

alarm value is timeout. The timeout period for this attribute is 150<br />

seconds, which is 30 seconds longer than the default heartbeat<br />

period on the URM agent. If 150 seconds has elapsed without the<br />

URM agent sending a heartbeat event report, this attribute value<br />

changes to timeout and an alarm is raised.<br />

<strong>User</strong>s This numeric attribute reports the total number of unique<br />

connections to the host. By default, this attribute has no<br />

thresholds.<br />

Connections This numeric attribute reports the total number of user<br />

connections to the host. The URM agent determines this value by<br />

counting the lines produced by the command who. By default,<br />

this attribute has no thresholds.<br />

Sample Period This numeric attribute reports the URM agent sample period. By<br />

default, this attribute has no thresholds.<br />

Heartbeat Period This numeric attribute reports the URM agent heartbeat period.<br />

By default, this attribute has no thresholds.<br />

D–4 7833 4778–008


D.2.2. CPU Class<br />

Attribute Description<br />

UnixMon Classification [UNIX]<br />

OS Version This string attribute identifies the operating system version.<br />

Model This string attribute identifies the UNIX system model as reported<br />

by the command name.<br />

The purpose of this class is to provide CPU utilization statistics. This class monitors each<br />

UNIX host system in the current configuration for which CPU monitoring is enabled.<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> automatically creates a component for each host as it<br />

receives an event report for it. The URM agent generates the event reports.<br />

Attribute Description<br />

Name This string attribute reports the name of the UNIX host as named<br />

in the current configuration.<br />

Idle % This numeric attribute reports the percentage of time the system<br />

is idle. The default minimum attention threshold is 15 (percent).<br />

<strong>User</strong> % This numeric attribute reports the percentage of time the system<br />

is running in user mode. The default maximum attention<br />

threshold is 75 (percent).<br />

System % This numeric attribute reports the percentage of time the system<br />

is running in system mode. The default maximum attention<br />

threshold is 75 (percent).<br />

Wait % This numeric attribute reports the percentage of time the system<br />

is waiting with some process blocked for input or output. The<br />

default maximum attention threshold is 75 (percent).<br />

D.2.3. FileSystem Class<br />

This class monitors each file system on each host in the current configuration for which<br />

file system monitoring is enabled. <strong>Status</strong> automatically creates a component in this class<br />

for each file system as <strong>Status</strong> receives an event report for it. The URM agent generates<br />

the event reports. The URM agent generates the event reports.<br />

Attribute Description<br />

Name This string attribute identifies the mount directory for the file<br />

system.<br />

Host This string attribute identifies the name of the host on which the<br />

file system resides.<br />

Inodes Free This numeric attribute reports the number of inodes not currently<br />

allocated. By default, this attribute has no thresholds.<br />

Space Used This string attribute reports the number of units of mass storage<br />

currently allocated, where the units are blocks or kilobytes, as<br />

indicated by the Unit attribute.<br />

7833 4778–008 D–5


UnixMon Classification [UNIX]<br />

Attribute Description<br />

Inodes Used This string attribute reports the number of inodes currently<br />

allocated.<br />

Total This string attribute reports the total storage capacity of the file<br />

system in units of blocks or kilobytes, as indicated by the Unit<br />

attribute.<br />

Unit This string attribute identifies the unit of measurement used for<br />

the attributes Space Free, Space Used, and Total. Possible units<br />

are blocks and Kbytes (kilobytes).<br />

Percent Space<br />

Used<br />

Percent Inodes<br />

Used<br />

This numeric attribute reports the percentage of blocks used. The<br />

default maximum attention threshold is 85 (percent). The default<br />

maximum alarm threshold is 90 (percent).<br />

This numeric attribute reports the percentage of inodes used. The<br />

default maximum attention threshold is 85 (percent). The default<br />

maximum alarm threshold is 90 (percent).<br />

Space Free This numeric attribute reports the number of units of mass<br />

storage not currently allocated, where the units are blocks or<br />

kilobytes, as indicated by the Unit attribute. By default, this<br />

attribute has no thresholds.<br />

D.2.4. LongProcess Class<br />

This class monitors processes that accumulate at least one minute of CPU time on each<br />

UNIX host in the current configuration for which LongProcess monitoring is enabled. The<br />

only exceptions are those processes identified to the URM agent as daemon processes.<br />

Specifically, the URM agent sends an AC event report for each process on the UNIX host<br />

that has accumulated at least 60 seconds of CPU time, if the process is not in the list of<br />

daemon processes defined in the URM policy installed on the managed system. For<br />

information on specifying daemon processes, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> automatically creates a LongProcess component in its<br />

data model when it receives the event report, if it has not already created that<br />

component. When the URM agent determines that a process previously added to this<br />

class is no longer active, it sends a DE event report to delete the component from the<br />

Single Point <strong>Status</strong> data model.<br />

Attribute Description<br />

Name This string attribute identifies the pid (process-id) of a running<br />

process; it uniquely identifies the process.<br />

Process Name This string attribute identifies the program being executed by the<br />

running process, as reported by the command ps.<br />

Host This string attribute identifies the name of the host on which the<br />

process is running.<br />

D–6 7833 4778–008


Attribute Description<br />

UnixMon Classification [UNIX]<br />

<strong>Status</strong> This status attribute reflects the process status. Possible values<br />

are running and indeterminate. Normally, this attribute has a value<br />

of running. If the URM agent stops reporting on a process without<br />

deleting it, the attribute is set to its default value of indeterminate.<br />

You can delete such a process from <strong>Status</strong> manually. The timeout<br />

period for this attribute is 330 seconds, which is 30 seconds<br />

longer than the default sample period of the URM agent.<br />

Message This string attribute has the same value as Process Name. If the<br />

program name is too long to appear in its entirety in tables or<br />

attribute lists, you can click on this attribute to see the full<br />

program name.<br />

CPU Time This string attribute reports the total CPU time accumulated by the<br />

process since its inception. The format of this attribute is<br />

minutes:seconds.<br />

<strong>User</strong>id This string attribute reports the user-id associated with the<br />

process.<br />

Seconds Gained This numeric attribute reports the number of seconds the process<br />

has gained during the sample interval. The default maximum<br />

attention threshold value is 60 (seconds).<br />

D.2.5. Process Class<br />

This class monitors all processes that are identified to the URM agent as critical<br />

processes on each UNIX host in the current configuration for which Process monitoring<br />

is enabled. A critical process is a process that is expected to remain up (running) at all<br />

times. By default, only cron is considered a critical process. For information on defining<br />

additional critical processes, see the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

The URM agent reports on each critical process whether it is running or not, since the<br />

primary purpose is to ensure that each is up and running. Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

automatically creates a component for each process as it receives an event report for it.<br />

Attribute Description<br />

Name This string attribute reports the name of the program executed by<br />

a critical process. It may be anything from a full path name<br />

(preceding the file name) to just the file name, depending on how<br />

the user has specified it in the URM policy.<br />

Host This string attribute identifies the name of the host on which the<br />

critical process runs.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> This status attribute reflects critical process status. Possible<br />

values are up and down. As long as the URM agent detects that<br />

the program remains running, it reports a status of up. If the<br />

agent no longer finds (or has never found) the program running, it<br />

reports a status of down, which raises an alarm.<br />

<strong>User</strong>id This string attribute identifies the user-id associated with the<br />

7833 4778–008 D–7


UnixMon Classification [UNIX]<br />

Attribute Description<br />

process.<br />

Process Id This string attribute identifies the process-id (pid) of the critical<br />

process.<br />

CPU Time This string attribute reports the total CPU time accumulated by the<br />

process since its inception. The format of this attribute is<br />

minutes:seconds.<br />

D.2.6. <strong>User</strong> Class<br />

This class monitors all users currently logged onto each UNIX host in the current<br />

configuration for which user monitoring is enabled. Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

automatically creates a component for each user as it receives an AC event report from<br />

the URM agent for that user. The URM agent sends a DE event report for each of these<br />

users as they log off, causing the <strong>User</strong> components to be automatically deleted from the<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> data model as users log off the managed hosts.<br />

Attribute Description<br />

Name This string attribute identifies the UNIX log-on of the user.<br />

Host This string attribute identifies the name of the host on which the<br />

user is logged in.<br />

<strong>Status</strong> This status attribute reflects the running status of the user.<br />

Possible values are logged in, superuser, and indeterminate. A<br />

status of logged in means that the user is logged onto the system<br />

with normal privileges; this is the expected value. A status of<br />

superuser means that the user has acquired superuser (root)<br />

privileges and, by default, raises an alarm. If the URM agent stops<br />

reporting on a user without deleting it, this attribute is set to its<br />

default value of indeterminate. You can delete such a process<br />

from <strong>Status</strong> manually. The timeout period for this attribute is 330<br />

seconds, which is 30 seconds longer than the default sample<br />

period of the URM agent.<br />

Person This string attribute reports the actual name of the person<br />

corresponding to the log-on, as specified in the file /etc/passwd on<br />

the managed system.<br />

D–8 7833 4778–008


Appendix E<br />

Classifications for ClearPath IX and<br />

ClearPath Plus Servers for OS 2200<br />

[OS 2200 UNIX]<br />

This appendix describes the use of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> in conjunction with a<br />

ClearPath IX or ClearPath Plus server for OS 2200. <strong>Status</strong> includes three predefined<br />

classifications that are designed primarily for monitoring ClearPath servers with Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

OS2200Mon This predefined classification allows you to monitor the OS 2200 nodes<br />

of ClearPath IX or ClearPath Plus for OS2200 servers. You can also use<br />

this classification for general monitoring of OS 2200 systems that are<br />

not part of ClearPath IX or ClearPath Plus for OS2200 servers.<br />

Unix2200Mon This predefined classification allows you to monitor the UNIX and<br />

OS 2200 nodes of ClearPath IX or ClearPath Plus for OS2200 servers.<br />

You can also use this classification for general monitoring of UNIX and<br />

OS 2200 systems that are not part of ClearPath IX or ClearPath Plus for<br />

OS2200 servers.<br />

TapeMon This predefined classification enables you to monitor tape drive activity<br />

on the OS 2200 nodes of ClearPath IX or ClearPath Plus for OS2200<br />

servers. See Appendix B for detailed information about the OS 2200<br />

Tape Monitor.<br />

7833 4778–008 E–1


Classifications for ClearPath IX and ClearPath Plus Servers for OS 2200 [OS 2200<br />

UNIX]<br />

E.1. Using the OS2200Mon Classification<br />

The classification OS2200Monx.y.z supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> consists of<br />

predefined classes from the classification generalx.y.z , where x.y.z is the release level of<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

[OS 2200]<br />

OS2200Monx.y.z includes the following classes from the classification generalx.y.z to<br />

support the OS 2200 component of ClearPath IX or ClearPath Plus for OS 2200 servers:<br />

• 2200_Host<br />

• Channel<br />

• Console<br />

• Control_Unit<br />

• Device<br />

• Disk<br />

• IOP<br />

• IP<br />

• Run<br />

• Storage_Area<br />

• Tape<br />

In addition, the following classes are included to support the OS 2200 nodes of ClearPath<br />

IX and ClearPath Plus servers:<br />

2200_Process This class reports the status of OS 2200 processes. Possible<br />

<strong>Status</strong> values include up and down. There is no default<br />

expected value for the <strong>Status</strong> attribute of this class.<br />

Background_Run This class reports the status of OS 2200 background runs.<br />

Possible <strong>Status</strong> values include running, completed,<br />

error_completed, not_running, and error_condition.<br />

The default expected <strong>Status</strong> value is running. The default<br />

attention value is error_condition. The remaining values<br />

generate an alarm.<br />

For <strong>Status</strong> to obtain information about these classes, you must use the patterns in the<br />

AMS database hmp_ix22 supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

E–2 7833 4778–008


Classifications for ClearPath IX and ClearPath Plus Servers for OS 2200 [OS 2200<br />

UNIX]<br />

E.2. Accessing the OS2200Mon Classification<br />

To access the classification OS2200Mon, select the classification OS2200Monx.y.z when<br />

you start <strong>Status</strong>. <strong>Status</strong> provides a default diagram. For further information about<br />

diagram definitions, see Section 5.<br />

This illustration shows the <strong>Status</strong> diagram for the classification OS2200Mon.<br />

Figure E–1. OS2200Mon <strong>Status</strong> Diagram<br />

7833 4778–008 E–3


Classifications for ClearPath IX and ClearPath Plus Servers for OS 2200 [OS 2200<br />

UNIX]<br />

E–4 7833 4778–008


Appendix F<br />

Predefined Icons Supplied with Single<br />

Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> includes a set of predefined .png icons for your use in two<br />

sizes:<br />

• Large icons are 50 pixels wide by 50 pixels high. The name of each large icon ends<br />

with “_lg.”<br />

• Small icons are 30 pixels wide by 25 pixels high. The name of each small icon ends<br />

with “_sm.”<br />

The following groups of predefined icons are provided with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

<strong>Status</strong>:<br />

• UNIX Resource Monitor classes<br />

• SMA and TeamQuest product icons<br />

• Alphabetic icons<br />

• System type icons<br />

• Hardware icons<br />

• Pictorial icons<br />

Note: In Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Level 7.4, the icons supplied with <strong>Status</strong> changed<br />

from bitmap icons to pixmap icons with a more modern three-dimensional appearance.<br />

Diagrams you have defined using previous levels of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> can continue<br />

to use the obsolete bitmap icons or you can modernize your <strong>Status</strong> displays with a single<br />

operation if you choose. See 5.1.5 and 7.3.5 for more information.<br />

See the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Administration and Configuration <strong>Guide</strong> for further<br />

information on the icons used by <strong>Status</strong> and on defining you own icon families.<br />

7833 4778–008 F–1


Predefined Icons Supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

F.1. Viewing Icons<br />

Both Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong> and the Configuration application allow you to view<br />

icons before you select them in component classes and component groups. In <strong>Status</strong>,<br />

you can view an icon family from a Define Groups table, as described in 5.1. In the<br />

Configuration application, you can view an icon family from the Define <strong>Status</strong><br />

Classification table, as described in 7.3.<br />

F.1.1. Icons for Use with the UNIX Resource Monitor<br />

Classifications<br />

The following icons are designed for use with the component classes defined in the<br />

classifications UnixMon (see Appendix D) and Unix2200Mon (see Appendix E):<br />

CpuChip_lg<br />

CpuChip_sm<br />

CriticalProcess_lg<br />

CriticalProcess_sm<br />

File_lg<br />

File_sm<br />

FileCompare_lg<br />

FileCompare_sm<br />

FileCompare2_lg<br />

FileCompare2_sm<br />

FilePattern_lg<br />

FilePattern_sm<br />

FileSystem_lg<br />

FileSystem_sm<br />

NetworkCollisions_lg<br />

NetworkCollisions_sm<br />

NetworkIO_lg<br />

NetworkIO_sm<br />

NetworkRPC_lg<br />

NetworkRPC_sm<br />

PrinterQueue_lg<br />

PrinterQueue_sm<br />

Process_lg<br />

Process_sm<br />

RemoteSystem_lg<br />

RemoteSystem_sm<br />

Runner_lg<br />

Runner_sm<br />

Safe_lg<br />

Safe_sm<br />

Smile_lg<br />

Smile_sm<br />

System_lg<br />

System_sm<br />

SystemLoad_lg<br />

SystemLoad_sm<br />

UnixHost_lg<br />

UnixHost_sm<br />

<strong>User</strong>_lg<br />

<strong>User</strong>_sm<br />

<strong>User</strong>2_lg<br />

<strong>User</strong>2_sm<br />

<strong>User</strong>3_lg<br />

<strong>User</strong>3_sm<br />

F–2 7833 4778–008


<strong>User</strong>4_lg<br />

<strong>User</strong>4_sm<br />

<strong>User</strong>DefinedAsync_lg<br />

<strong>User</strong>DefinedAsync_sm<br />

<strong>User</strong>DefinedMonitor_lg<br />

<strong>User</strong>DefinedMonitor_sm<br />

<strong>User</strong>DefinedScript_lg<br />

<strong>User</strong>DefinedScript_sm<br />

Yuk_lg<br />

Yuk_sm<br />

Predefined Icons Supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

F.1.2. Icons for Use with Products from SMA and TeamQuest<br />

The following icons are designed for use with products from SMA and TeamQuest:<br />

Alpha_SMA_lg<br />

Alpha_SMA_sm<br />

Alpha_TQ_lg<br />

Alpha_TQ_sm<br />

SMAerror_lg<br />

SMAerror_sm<br />

SMAheld_lg<br />

SMAheld_sm<br />

SMArunning_lg<br />

SMArunning_sm<br />

SMAsetup_lg<br />

SMAsetup_sm<br />

F.1.3. Additional Alphabetic Icons<br />

Each of the following icons consists of the letters in the central part of its name. For<br />

example, alpha_ApG_lg is a large bitmap of the letters “ApG.”<br />

Alpha_ApG_lg<br />

Alpha_ApG_sm<br />

Alpha_CM_lg<br />

Alpha_CM_sm<br />

Alpha_CPU_lg<br />

Alpha_CPU_sm<br />

Alpha_Dev_lg<br />

Alpha_Dev_sm<br />

Alpha_FS_lg<br />

Alpha_FS_sm<br />

Alpha_IOP_lg<br />

Alpha_IOP_sm<br />

Alpha_IP_lg<br />

Alpha_IP_sm<br />

Alpha_Mem_lg<br />

Alpha_Mem_sm<br />

Alpha_Prnt_lg<br />

Alpha_Prnt_sm<br />

Alpha_Proc_lg<br />

Alpha_Proc_sm<br />

7833 4778–008 F–3


Predefined Icons Supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

F.1.4. Additional System Type Icons<br />

The following additional system type icons are included with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

<strong>Status</strong>:<br />

2200Host_lg<br />

2200Host_sm<br />

MCPHost_lg<br />

MCPHost_sm<br />

ArbSystem_lg<br />

ArbSystem_sm<br />

NTHost_lg<br />

NTHost_sm<br />

F.1.5. Additional Hardware Icons<br />

The following additional hardware icons are included with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>:<br />

Channel_lg<br />

Channel_sm<br />

Console_lg<br />

Console_sm<br />

ControlUnit_lg<br />

ControlUnit_sm<br />

Device_lg<br />

Device_sm<br />

Disk_lg<br />

Disk_sm<br />

IOP_lg<br />

IOP_sm<br />

IP_lg<br />

IP_sm<br />

Memory_lg<br />

Memory_sm<br />

Printer_lg<br />

Printer_sm<br />

SPO_lg<br />

SPO_sm<br />

Tape_lg<br />

Tape_sm<br />

F–4 7833 4778–008


Predefined Icons Supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

F.1.6. Additional Pictorial Icons<br />

The following additional pictorial icons are included with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong>:<br />

Backup_lg<br />

Backup_sm<br />

Ekg_lg<br />

Ekg_sm<br />

Error_lg<br />

Error_sm<br />

EyesUNIX_lg<br />

EyesUNIX_sm<br />

Eyes_lg<br />

Eyes_sm<br />

Generic_lg<br />

Generic_sm<br />

Held_lg<br />

Held_sm<br />

Horse_lg<br />

Horse_sm<br />

Log_lg<br />

Log_sm<br />

Messages_lg<br />

Messages_sm<br />

Paging_lg<br />

Paging_sm<br />

Run_lg<br />

Run_sm<br />

Running_lg<br />

Running_sm<br />

Setup_lg<br />

Setup_sm<br />

<strong>Status</strong>_lg<br />

<strong>Status</strong>_sm<br />

Telephone_lg<br />

Telephone_sm<br />

7833 4778–008 F–5


Predefined Icons Supplied with Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Status</strong><br />

F–6 7833 4778–008


Appendix G<br />

Related Product Information<br />

The <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong> product documentation library is provided as a set of online<br />

documents in Portable Documentation Format (PDF) on the <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong><br />

Software and Product Information CD-ROM. The CD-ROM contains the <strong>Operations</strong><br />

<strong>Sentinel</strong> software, product documentation library, and the Adobe Reader. Print-ready<br />

versions (PDF files) of the product documentation are available on the <strong>Unisys</strong> <strong>Support</strong><br />

Web site at (http://www.support.unisys.com/).<br />

Online Help is embedded in the <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong> software. Installation Help is<br />

available from the <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong> browser.<br />

The following documents may be helpful when you use <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong>. Use the<br />

version that corresponds to the level of software in use at your site.<br />

2200 Series Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface Software Installation and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong> (7831 3400)<br />

This guide explains how to install and configure the Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface<br />

software on each of the OS 2200 system consoles you want to manage.<br />

MCP/AS System Administration <strong>Guide</strong> (8600 0437)<br />

This guide provides the information required to make decisions about system<br />

configuration, peripheral configuration, file management, resource use, and other matters<br />

related to MCP system administration. It is written for users with some, little, or no MCP<br />

experience who are responsible for making decisions about system administration.<br />

MCP/AS System Configuration <strong>Guide</strong> (8600 0445)<br />

This guide describes how to organize a complex MCP computer system into different<br />

hardware configurations. It also describes the steps required to dynamically change a<br />

system from one configuration to another. This guide is written for experienced system<br />

administrators and system operators.<br />

ClearPath Enterprise Servers System Messages <strong>Support</strong> Reference Manual<br />

(8600 0429)<br />

This guide lists and describes MCP messages.<br />

7833 4778–008 G–1


Related Product Information<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface for ClearPath MCP Installation and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong> (7844 8131)<br />

This guide explains how to configure Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Interface software on each<br />

of the MCP host systems that you want to manage. The tasks include installing,<br />

configuring, and starting the software.<br />

ClearPath Enterprise Servers <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong> Autoaction Message<br />

System Administration <strong>Guide</strong> (7862 6900)<br />

This guide provides information about how to develop and use Single Point <strong>Operations</strong><br />

Autoaction Message System (SP-AMS) to automate your MCP and UNIX system and<br />

ClearPath Plus OS 2200 Autoaction Message System (CP-AMS) to automate your<br />

ClearPath Plus servers.<br />

ClearPath Enterprise Servers <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong> Administration and<br />

Configuration <strong>Guide</strong> (7862 2321)<br />

This guide explains how to configure Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

ClearPath Enterprise Servers <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong> Console <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(7862 5977)<br />

This guide explains the operator functions for Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Console.<br />

ClearPath Enterprise Servers <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong> Event Server<br />

Application Program Interface Programming <strong>Guide</strong> (7844 8107)<br />

This guide explains how to program and administer clients for the Event Server<br />

application program interface (API) of Single Point <strong>Operations</strong>.<br />

ClearPath Enterprise Servers <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Sentinel</strong> Master Glossary<br />

(7847 4244)<br />

This glossary consolidates terminology and definitions, including abbreviations and<br />

acronyms.<br />

SMART for ClearPath OS 2200 Administration and <strong>Operations</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(7830 7337)<br />

This guide explains how to set up an OS 2200 host system to operate with SMART,<br />

enabling you to automate system operations.<br />

G–2 7833 4778–008


Index<br />

A<br />

adding<br />

component class, 7-15<br />

component definitions, 6-5<br />

Component Group table templates, 5-19<br />

component groups, 5-9<br />

default component group, 5-10, 5-11<br />

host-independent component group, 5-12<br />

Alarm attribute, 4-12<br />

alarm Default Alarm Maximum value, 7-20<br />

Alarm Id<br />

numeric attribute, 7-21<br />

status attribute, 7-19<br />

alarm text substitution strings, 7-13<br />

alarm values, 6-4, 7-18<br />

alarms, controlling duplicate behavior, 7-23<br />

alphabetic icons, predefined, F-3<br />

ANSI X3.64 host attributes, 4-22<br />

application initialization mnemonic value<br />

(table), 7-10<br />

arbitrary systems, 1-6<br />

Associated Attr string attribute, 7-22<br />

attention Default Alarm Maximum value, 7-20<br />

attribute lists<br />

description (figure), 3-19<br />

displaying, 3-20<br />

menus, 3-21<br />

updating, 3-19<br />

attribute name<br />

numeric attribute, 7-20<br />

status attribute, 7-17<br />

ATTRIBUTE substitution string, 7-13<br />

attribute value pairs, 2-2<br />

attributes<br />

Alarm, 4-12<br />

alarm values, 6-4<br />

applicable to all component classes, 4-6<br />

Class, 1-3, 4-6<br />

Classes (table), 5-7<br />

component, 4-1<br />

Component names (table), 5-7<br />

Component Scope, 4-9<br />

Connected Consoles, 4-15<br />

Connected Host, 4-18<br />

Connected to application, 4-19<br />

Connected to application, 4-17, 4-22<br />

Connected to Host, 4-17<br />

Connections, D-4<br />

CPU Time, D-7, D-8<br />

Data Collection, 4-14, 4-19<br />

data types, 4-2<br />

description, 1-8<br />

Event Received, 4-9<br />

Event Report Time, 4-8<br />

Exceptions, 4-6<br />

Exec Level, 4-14<br />

Expected, 4-11<br />

expected values, 6-4<br />

for ANSI X3.64 hosts, 4-22<br />

for MCP hosts, 4-19<br />

for OS 2200 consoles, 4-17<br />

for OS 2200 hosts, 4-14<br />

for UNIX hosts, 4-22<br />

for UnixMon classification, D-4<br />

Groups, 4-9<br />

Heartbeat Period, D-4<br />

Heartbeat <strong>Status</strong>, D-4<br />

Host, D-5, D-6, D-7, D-8<br />

Host, 4-6<br />

Host Agent Active, 4-20<br />

Hosts (table), 5-7<br />

Identical Components, 4-10<br />

Idle %, D-5<br />

initiating actions, 3-21<br />

Inodes Free, D-5<br />

Inodes Used, D-6<br />

list, 4-5<br />

Message, D-7<br />

Message, 4-8<br />

Model, D-5<br />

Monitor, 4-17, 4-19, 4-22<br />

Name, D-4, D-5, D-6, D-7, D-8<br />

Name, 4-6<br />

Notes, 4-7<br />

numeric, 4-12<br />

numeric, 4-4<br />

OS Version, D-5<br />

7833 4778–008 Index–1


Index<br />

Percent Inodes Used, D-6<br />

Percent Space Used, D-6<br />

Person, D-8<br />

Process Id, D-8<br />

Process Name, D-6<br />

reported (table), 4-2<br />

Sample Period, D-4<br />

Seconds Gained, D-7<br />

Seen, 4-7<br />

Site Id, 4-14<br />

site-defined, 4-11, 7-17, 7-21<br />

Space Free, D-6<br />

Space Used, D-5<br />

specified (table), 4-2<br />

status, 7-17<br />

status, 4-3, 4-11<br />

<strong>Status</strong>, D-4, D-7, D-8<br />

string, 4-13, 7-21<br />

string, 4-4<br />

System %, D-5<br />

System Type, 4-15<br />

threshold values, 6-5<br />

Total, D-6<br />

types (table), 4-2<br />

Unit, D-6<br />

<strong>User</strong> %, D-5<br />

<strong>User</strong> Defined, 4-9<br />

<strong>User</strong> Defined, 6-3<br />

<strong>User</strong>id, D-7, D-8<br />

<strong>User</strong>s, D-4<br />

Wait %, D-5<br />

Autoaction Message System (AMS) database<br />

MCP Tape Monitor, 2-6<br />

OS 2200 Tape Monitor, 2-6<br />

OS 2200 Tape Monitor, 2-5<br />

automatic creation scheme value (table), 7-9<br />

automatic environment setup, 2-21<br />

B<br />

bitmap icons<br />

updating, 5-5, 7-9<br />

C<br />

Cancel button (table), 3-23<br />

chan initialization mnemonic value<br />

(table), 7-10<br />

changing<br />

attribute columns in component table<br />

template, 5-18<br />

background for group window, 5-12<br />

class associated with table template, 5-18<br />

classification, 2-22<br />

classification, 2-12<br />

component definitions, 6-3<br />

Component Group table template, 5-6<br />

component groups in current diagram, 5-2<br />

configurations, 2-23<br />

current diagram definition, 5-23<br />

display behavior of component table<br />

template, 5-18<br />

environment, 2-22<br />

label of component group, 5-3<br />

name of component group, 5-3<br />

resource sets, 2-23<br />

screen size of component table<br />

template, 5-17<br />

title of group window, 5-13<br />

trace level, 2-24<br />

Class attribute, 1-3, 4-6<br />

CLASS attribute value pairs, 2-2<br />

class label, 7-8<br />

CLASS substitution string, 7-13<br />

classifications<br />

changing, 2-22<br />

changing, 2-12<br />

creating, 7-3<br />

defining, 2-11<br />

description, 2-12<br />

editing, 7-3<br />

for ClearPath servers, E-1<br />

general, 1-8<br />

general, 2-12<br />

independent of resource sets and<br />

configurations, 2-15<br />

MCP, C-2<br />

MCPTapeMon, 2-13<br />

OS 2200 TapeMon, B-2<br />

relation to configuration, 7-2<br />

relationship to diagram definitions<br />

(figure), 2-17<br />

removing, 7-6<br />

saving, 7-5<br />

selecting, 7-5<br />

TapeMon, 2-13<br />

Unix2200Mon, 2-13, E-3<br />

UnixMon, D-2<br />

UnixMon, 2-13<br />

Clear button (table), 3-23<br />

ClearPath server classifications, E-1<br />

Index–2 7833 4778–008


color coding, 3-4<br />

component classes<br />

adding, 7-15<br />

class label, 7-8<br />

copying, 7-15<br />

creation scheme, 7-9<br />

default scope, 7-9<br />

deleting, 7-16<br />

description, 1-8<br />

editing<br />

single, 7-23<br />

initialization mnemonic, 7-10, 7-11<br />

instruction file, 7-12<br />

internal class, changing, 7-7<br />

merging, 7-16<br />

renaming, 7-7<br />

retaining notefile s, 7-13<br />

system types, 7-8<br />

component definitions<br />

adding, 6-5<br />

changing, 6-3<br />

Component Group table<br />

adding templates, 5-19<br />

changing template, 5-6<br />

deleting templates, 5-20<br />

description (figure), 3-11<br />

display behaviors, 3-12<br />

selecting default templates, 5-20<br />

templates, 3-13<br />

component groups<br />

adding, 5-9<br />

adding default, 5-11<br />

copying, 5-9<br />

default<br />

adding, 5-10<br />

deleting, 5-11<br />

moving, 5-11<br />

defining, 5-2<br />

deleting, 5-9<br />

description, 1-11<br />

host-independent, adding, 5-12<br />

label, changing, 5-3<br />

name, changing, 5-3<br />

specifying components for, 5-7<br />

Component Scope attribute values (table), 4-9<br />

component sets<br />

definitions<br />

deleting, 6-9<br />

replacing, 6-7<br />

description, 2-18<br />

introduction, 6-1<br />

retrieving, 6-10<br />

Component Sets menu (figure), 3-8<br />

Index<br />

component tables<br />

changing<br />

attribute columns in template, 5-18<br />

display behavior of template, 5-18<br />

screen size of template, 5-17<br />

defining templates, 5-15<br />

types, 3-11<br />

components<br />

attributes, 1-8<br />

attributes, 4-1<br />

class, 1-10<br />

class label, 7-8<br />

creating, 1-11<br />

creation scheme, 7-9<br />

default scope, 7-9<br />

defining<br />

new, 6-5<br />

defining<br />

explicitly, 6-2<br />

deleting, 3-13, 6-5<br />

deleting, 3-22<br />

description, 1-8<br />

host, 1-10<br />

identifying, 1-10<br />

initialization mnemonic, 7-10, 7-11<br />

instruction file, 7-12<br />

instruction file, 6-4<br />

name, 1-10<br />

new, defining, 6-5<br />

obtaining information on (figure), 2-8<br />

reselecting for different host or class, 6-6<br />

retaining note files, 7-13<br />

scope, 6-3<br />

shared, 1-10<br />

specifying for group, 5-7<br />

system types, 7-8<br />

Components with Notes table, 3-15<br />

Components with Unexpected Values table<br />

(figure), 3-14<br />

Configuration application, 7-2<br />

configurations<br />

changing, 2-23<br />

description, 2-15<br />

independent of classifications and<br />

resource sets, 2-15<br />

relationship to diagram definitions<br />

(figure), 2-17<br />

configuring<br />

site-defined attributes, 7-17, 7-21<br />

<strong>Status</strong>, 2-10<br />

status attributes, 7-17<br />

string attributes, 7-21<br />

Connected Consoles attribute, 4-15<br />

7833 4778–008 Index–3


Index<br />

Connected Host attribute, 4-18<br />

Connected to application attribute, 4-17, 4-19,<br />

4-22<br />

Connected to Host attribute, 4-17<br />

Connections attribute, UNIX Host class<br />

(table), D-4<br />

controlling duplicate alarm behavior, 7-23<br />

copying<br />

component class, 7-15<br />

component groups, 5-9<br />

CPU class, D-5<br />

CPU Time attribute, LongProcess class<br />

(table), D-7<br />

CPU Time attribute, Process class (table), D-8<br />

creating<br />

components, 1-11<br />

new classification, 7-3<br />

Creation Scheme host class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-4<br />

OS 2200, B-5<br />

Creation Scheme tape class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-3<br />

OS 2200, B-3<br />

creation scheme values (table), 7-9<br />

cu initialization mnemonic value (table), 7-10<br />

D<br />

Data Collection attribute, 4-14, 4-19<br />

data collector, 1-11<br />

MCP, 2-6<br />

OS 2200, 2-6<br />

OS 2200, 2-5<br />

data flow to <strong>Status</strong> (figure), 1-6<br />

data types of attributes, 4-2<br />

Default Alarm Maximum status attribute, 7-20<br />

Default Alarm Minimum numeric<br />

attribute, 7-20<br />

Default Attention Maximum numeric<br />

attribute, 7-20<br />

Default Attention Minimum status<br />

attribute, 7-20<br />

default scope, 7-9<br />

Default Scope host class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-4<br />

OS 2200, B-5<br />

Default Scope tape class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-3<br />

OS 2200, B-3<br />

Default status attribute, 7-19<br />

Define Component Groups table (figure), 5-2<br />

Define Component Tables table (figure), 5-15<br />

Define <strong>Status</strong> Classification window, 7-3<br />

defining<br />

classifications, 7-3<br />

component groups, 5-2<br />

component table templates, 5-15<br />

components for different host or class, 6-6<br />

subgroups, 5-8<br />

defining classification (figure), 2-11<br />

deleting<br />

component classes, 7-16<br />

Component Group table templates, 5-20<br />

component groups, 5-9<br />

component set definitions, 6-9<br />

components, 3-13, 6-5<br />

components, 3-22<br />

default component group, 5-11<br />

diagram definitions, 5-22<br />

dev initialization mnemonic value (table), 7-10<br />

diagram definitions<br />

automatic deletion, 5-22<br />

changing current, 5-23<br />

deleting, 5-22<br />

description, 2-15, 5-1<br />

relationship to classifications and<br />

configurations, 2-17<br />

replacing current, 5-21<br />

saving, 5-21<br />

Diagrams menu (figure), 3-7<br />

dialog windows<br />

buttons (table), 3-23<br />

description (figure), 3-23<br />

entering information, 3-23<br />

disk initialization mnemonic value (table), 7-10<br />

display behavior<br />

component table template, changing, 5-18<br />

introduction, 3-12<br />

displaying<br />

attribute list, 3-20<br />

icons, 2-13<br />

displays<br />

behavior, 3-12<br />

features (figure), 3-2<br />

introduction, 3-1<br />

primary, 3-2<br />

secondary, 3-2<br />

duplicate alarm behavior, controlling, 7-23<br />

dynamic display behavior, 3-12, 3-13<br />

Index–4 7833 4778–008


E<br />

Edit Components table (figure), 6-2<br />

editing<br />

existing classification, 7-3<br />

single component class, 7-23<br />

entering information in dialog windows, 3-23<br />

environment<br />

automatic setup, 2-21<br />

changing, 2-22<br />

Event Received attribute, 4-9<br />

Event Report Time attribute, 4-8<br />

event reports<br />

considerations, 2-2<br />

description, 1-9<br />

example, 2-3<br />

logging, A-2<br />

exception conditions, A-3<br />

exceptions and operator action, 3-6<br />

Exceptions attribute, 4-6<br />

Exec Level attribute, 4-14<br />

Expected attribute, 4-11<br />

expected values, status attribute, 6-4, 7-18<br />

Explain button (table), 3-24<br />

explicit_only creation scheme value<br />

(table), 7-10<br />

F<br />

File menu (figure), 3-7<br />

files<br />

instruction, 1-11<br />

note, 1-11<br />

FileSystem class, D-5<br />

first string attribute name, string<br />

attribute, 7-21<br />

G<br />

general classification, 1-8, 2-12<br />

Generate Alarms host class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-4<br />

OS 2200, B-5<br />

Generate Alarms tape class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-3<br />

OS 2200, B-3<br />

gray, 3-4<br />

green, 3-4<br />

Groups attribute, 4-9<br />

Index<br />

7833 4778–008 Index–5<br />

H<br />

hardware icons, predefined, F-4<br />

Heartbeat Period attribute, UNIX Host class<br />

(table), D-4<br />

Heartbeat <strong>Status</strong> attribute, UNIX Host class<br />

(table), D-4<br />

Help menu, 3-8, 3-21<br />

Host Agent Active attribute, 4-20<br />

Host attribute, 4-6<br />

FileSystem class (table), D-5<br />

LongProcess class (table), D-6<br />

Process class (table), D-7<br />

<strong>User</strong> class (table), D-8<br />

Host scope value (table), 4-9, 7-9<br />

HOSTID substitution string, 7-13<br />

I<br />

icon bitmap files, 2-14<br />

Icon host class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-4<br />

OS 2200, B-5<br />

Icon tape class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-3<br />

OS 2200, B-3<br />

icons<br />

color coding, 3-4<br />

displaying, 2-13<br />

family, selecting, 7-8<br />

positioning, 5-5<br />

predefined, F-1<br />

selecting, 5-4<br />

update obsolete bitmap icons, 5-5, 7-9<br />

Identical Components attribute, 4-10<br />

Identical Components table (figure), 3-17<br />

Idle % attribute, CPU class (table), D-5<br />

Init Mnemonic host class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-4<br />

OS 2200, B-5<br />

Init Mnemonic tape class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-3<br />

OS 2200, B-3<br />

initialization mnemonic, 7-11<br />

initialization mnemonic values (table), 7-10<br />

initialization of applications, 4-16, 4-20<br />

initiating actions, 3-21<br />

Inodes Free attribute, FileSystem class<br />

(table), D-5<br />

Inodes Used attribute, FileSystem class<br />

(table), D-6


Index<br />

INSTANCE attribute value pairs, 2-2<br />

instruction file, 1-11, 6-4, 7-12<br />

Instruction File host class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-4<br />

OS 2200, B-5<br />

Instruction File tape class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-3<br />

OS 2200, B-3<br />

internal class, 7-7<br />

Internal Class host class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-4<br />

OS 2200, B-5<br />

Internal Class tape class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-3<br />

OS 2200, B-3<br />

iop initialization mnemonic value (table), 7-10<br />

ip initialization mnemonic value (table), 7-10<br />

L<br />

labels, changing, 5-3<br />

list attributes, 4-5<br />

log<br />

event reports, A-2<br />

exception conditions, A-3<br />

message information, A-3<br />

message type codes, A-3<br />

recording trace information, 2-24<br />

SP-STATUS, A-3<br />

Log View window, 2-24<br />

logging event reports, A-2<br />

LongProcess class, D-6<br />

M<br />

maximum threshold values, 6-5<br />

MCP<br />

data collector, 2-6<br />

operating considerations, 2-6<br />

requirements<br />

Single Point Autoaction Message<br />

System (SP-AMS) database, 2-6<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> for ClearPath<br />

MCP software, 2-6<br />

MCP<br />

Creation Scheme host class<br />

characteristic, C-4<br />

Creation Scheme tape class<br />

characteristic, C-3<br />

Default Scope host class<br />

characteristic, C-4<br />

Default Scope tape class<br />

characteristic, C-3<br />

Generate Alarms host class<br />

characteristic, C-4<br />

Generate Alarms tape class<br />

characteristic, C-3<br />

Icon host class characteristic, C-4<br />

Icon tape class characteristic, C-3<br />

Init Mnemonic host class<br />

characteristic, C-4<br />

Init Mnemonic tape class<br />

characteristic, C-3<br />

Instruction File host class<br />

characteristic, C-4<br />

Instruction File tape class<br />

characteristic, C-3<br />

Internal Class host class characteristic, C-4<br />

Internal Class tape class characteristic, C-3<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Attribute host class<br />

characteristic, C-4<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Attribute tape class<br />

characteristic, C-3<br />

System Types host class<br />

characteristic, C-4<br />

System Types tape class<br />

characteristic, C-3<br />

Tape Class string attributes tape class<br />

characteristic, C-3<br />

Tape Monitor, C-1<br />

MCP systems and <strong>Status</strong> (figure), 2-7<br />

MCPTapeMon classification, 2-13<br />

menu structure of <strong>Status</strong> (figure), 1-7<br />

menus<br />

attribute list, 3-21<br />

Delete, 3-22<br />

pull-down, 3-7<br />

merging component classes, 7-16<br />

Message attribute, 4-8<br />

Message attribute, LongProcess class<br />

(table), D-7<br />

MESSAGE substitution string, 7-13<br />

message type codes, A-3<br />

minimum threshold values, 6-5<br />

Model attribute, UNIX Host class (table), D-5<br />

Monitor attribute, 4-17, 4-19, 4-22<br />

moving default component group, 5-11<br />

Index–6 7833 4778–008


N<br />

Name attribute, 4-6<br />

CPU class (table), D-5<br />

FileSystem class (table), D-5<br />

LongProcess class (table), D-6<br />

Process class (table), D-7<br />

UNIX Host class (table), D-4<br />

<strong>User</strong> class (table), D-8<br />

NAME substitution string, 7-13<br />

none creation scheme value (table), 7-10<br />

normal Default Alarm Maximum value, 7-20<br />

note files, 1-11<br />

Notes attribute, 4-7<br />

numeric attributes, 4-4, 4-12<br />

Alarm Id, 7-21<br />

Default Alarm Minimum, 7-20<br />

Default Attention Maximum, 7-20<br />

name, 7-20<br />

Severity, 7-21<br />

O<br />

OK button (table), 3-23<br />

OMKEY background run, 2-5, 2-6<br />

operating considerations, 2-2<br />

MCP, 2-6<br />

OS 2200, 2-6<br />

OS 2200, 2-5<br />

operator actions (table), 3-6<br />

OS 2200<br />

console attributes, 4-17<br />

Creation Scheme host class<br />

characteristic, B-5<br />

Creation Scheme tape class<br />

characteristic, B-3<br />

data collector, 2-5, 2-6<br />

Default Scope host class<br />

characteristic, B-5<br />

Default Scope tape class<br />

characteristic, B-3<br />

Generate Alarms host class<br />

characteristic, B-5<br />

Generate Alarms tape class<br />

characteristic, B-3<br />

host attributes, 4-14<br />

Icon host class characteristic, B-5<br />

Icon tape class characteristic, B-3<br />

Init Mnemonic host class<br />

characteristic, B-5<br />

Index<br />

Init Mnemonic tape class<br />

characteristic, B-3<br />

Instruction File host class<br />

characteristic, B-5<br />

Instruction File tape class<br />

characteristic, B-3<br />

Internal Class host class characteristic, B-5<br />

Internal Class tape class characteristic, B-3<br />

operating considerations, 2-5, 2-6<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Attribute host class<br />

characteristic, B-5<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Attribute tape class<br />

characteristic, B-3<br />

System Types host class<br />

characteristic, B-5<br />

System Types tape class<br />

characteristic, B-3<br />

Tape Class string attributes tape class<br />

characteristic, B-3<br />

Tape Monitor AMS database, 2-5, 2-6<br />

OS 2200 systems and <strong>Status</strong> (figure), 2-6<br />

OS Version attribute, UNIX Host class<br />

(table), D-5<br />

7833 4778–008 Index–7<br />

P<br />

Percent Inodes Used attribute, FileSystem<br />

class (table), D-6<br />

Percent Space Used attribute, FileSystem<br />

class (table), D-6<br />

Person attribute, <strong>User</strong> class (table), D-8<br />

pictorial icons, predefined, F-5<br />

positioning icons, 5-5<br />

possible values<br />

status attribute, 7-17<br />

predefined icons, F-1, F-3, F-4, F-5<br />

primary windows, 3-2<br />

printer initialization mnemonic value<br />

(table), 7-10<br />

Process class, D-7<br />

Process Id attribute, Process class (table), D-8<br />

Process Name attribute, LongProcess class<br />

(table), D-6<br />

pull-down menus, 3-7<br />

R<br />

red, 3-4<br />

renaming component class, 7-7


Index<br />

replacing<br />

component set definition, 6-7<br />

current diagram definition, 5-21, 5-23<br />

reported attributes (table), 4-2<br />

resource sets<br />

changing current, 2-23<br />

description, 2-15<br />

independent of classifications and<br />

configurations, 2-15<br />

retaining note files, 7-13<br />

retrieving component set, 6-10<br />

S<br />

sa initialization mnemonic value (table), 7-10<br />

Sample Period attribute, UNIX Host class<br />

(table), D-4<br />

saving<br />

diagram definitions, 5-21<br />

scope of component, 6-3<br />

secondary windows, 3-2<br />

Seconds Gained attribute, LongProcess class<br />

(table), D-7<br />

Seen attribute, 4-7<br />

setting up <strong>Status</strong>, 2-12<br />

Severity numeric attribute, 7-21<br />

Severity status attribute, 7-19<br />

shared component, 1-10<br />

Shared scope value (table), 4-9, 7-9<br />

Single Point Autoaction Message System<br />

(SP-AMS), 2-6<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> Configuration<br />

application, 7-2<br />

Single Point <strong>Operations</strong> workstation, starting<br />

<strong>Status</strong> from, 2-20<br />

Site Id attribute, 4-14<br />

site-defined attributes<br />

configuring, 7-17, 7-21<br />

numeric, 4-12<br />

status, 4-11, 7-17<br />

status, 4-3<br />

string, 4-13, 7-21<br />

table, 4-11<br />

SMA products, predefined icons for, F-3<br />

Space Free attribute, FileSystem class<br />

(table), D-6<br />

Space Used attribute, FileSystem class<br />

(table), D-5<br />

specified attributes (table), 4-2<br />

SP-STATUS log, A-3<br />

starting <strong>Status</strong>, 2-19<br />

static display behavior, 3-12<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Attribute host class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-4<br />

OS 2200, B-5<br />

<strong>Status</strong> Attribute tape class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-3<br />

OS 2200, B-3<br />

status attributes<br />

Alarm Id, 7-19<br />

alarm values, 7-18<br />

configuring, 7-17<br />

Default, 7-19<br />

Default Alarm Maximum, 7-20<br />

Default Attention Minimum, 7-20<br />

description, 4-3<br />

expected values, 7-18<br />

in component tables and attribute<br />

lists, 4-11<br />

LongProcess class (table), D-7<br />

name, 7-17<br />

possible values, 7-17<br />

Process class (table), D-7<br />

Severity, 7-19<br />

Timeout, 7-19<br />

UNIX Host class (table), D-4<br />

<strong>User</strong> class (table), D-8<br />

<strong>Status</strong> diagram<br />

as primary window, 3-2<br />

color coding, 3-4<br />

definition, 2-15<br />

icons, 2-13<br />

introduction, 3-3<br />

operator action, 3-6<br />

pull-down menus, 3-7<br />

subgroup windows, 3-10<br />

updating, 3-5<br />

<strong>Status</strong> diagram (figure), 3-3<br />

<strong>Status</strong> display (figure), 1-4<br />

string attributes, 4-4, 4-13<br />

Associated Attr, 7-22<br />

configuring, 7-21<br />

first string attribute name, 7-21<br />

subgroups<br />

defining, 5-8<br />

menus, 3-10<br />

windows, 3-10<br />

substitution strings for alarm text, 7-13<br />

sys initialization mnemonic value (table), 7-10<br />

System % attribute, CPU class (table), D-5<br />

system icons, predefined, F-4<br />

System Type attribute, 4-15<br />

system types, 7-8<br />

Index–8 7833 4778–008


System Types host class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-4<br />

OS 2200, B-5<br />

System Types tape class characteristic<br />

MCP, C-3<br />

OS 2200, B-3<br />

T<br />

tables<br />

component, types (table), 3-11<br />

Components with Notes (figure), 3-15<br />

Components with Unexpected Values<br />

(figure), 3-14<br />

Define Component Groups (figure), 5-2<br />

Define Groups, 5-2<br />

Identical Components (figure), 3-17<br />

Unreported Components, 3-16, A-5<br />

Tables menu (figure), 3-7<br />

Tape Class string attributes tape class<br />

characteristic<br />

MCP, C-3<br />

OS 2200, B-3<br />

tape initialization mnemonic value<br />

(table), 7-10<br />

Tape Monitor<br />

AMS database, 2-6<br />

AMS database, 2-5<br />

table, 2-4<br />

Tape Monitor table (figure), 2-4<br />

TapeMon classification, 2-13<br />

TeamQuest products, predefined icons<br />

for, F-3<br />

templates<br />

Component Group table<br />

deleting, 5-20<br />

description, 3-13<br />

selecting different, 5-20<br />

Component Group table<br />

adding, 5-19<br />

component table, changing<br />

attribute columns in, 5-18<br />

component table, changing<br />

behavior of, 5-18<br />

class associated with, 5-18<br />

screen size, 5-17<br />

component table, defining, 5-15<br />

defining component table, 5-15<br />

terminating <strong>Status</strong>, 2-21<br />

threshold values, 6-5<br />

TIME substitution string, 7-13<br />

Index<br />

Timeout status attribute, 7-19<br />

Total attribute, FileSystem class (table), D-6<br />

trace levels, 2-24, A-2<br />

troubleshooting, A-1<br />

TYPE attribute value pairs, 2-2<br />

7833 4778–008 Index–9<br />

U<br />

<strong>Unisys</strong> <strong>Support</strong> Center, A-6<br />

Unit attribute, FileSystem class (table), D-6<br />

UNIX host attributes, 4-19, 4-22<br />

UNIX Host class, D-4<br />

UNIX Resource Monitor, icons predefined for<br />

use with, F-2<br />

UNIX systems<br />

considerations, 2-7<br />

UNIX Resource Monitor, D-2<br />

Unix2200Mon classification, 2-13, E-3<br />

Unix2200Mon <strong>Status</strong> diagram (figure), E-3<br />

UnixMon classification, 2-13<br />

attributes, D-4<br />

CPU class, D-5<br />

FileSystem class, D-5<br />

LongProcess class, D-6<br />

Process class, D-7<br />

UNIX Host class, D-4<br />

<strong>User</strong> class, D-8<br />

UnixMon <strong>Status</strong> diagram (figure), D-2<br />

Unknown button (table), 3-23<br />

Unreported Components table<br />

contents, A-5<br />

figure, 3-16<br />

<strong>User</strong> % attribute, CPU class (table), D-5<br />

<strong>User</strong> class, D-8<br />

user classes, 2-15<br />

<strong>User</strong> Defined attribute, 4-9, 6-3<br />

<strong>User</strong>id attribute<br />

LongProcess class (table), D-7<br />

Process class (table), D-8<br />

users<br />

definitions, 2-15<br />

<strong>User</strong>s attribute, UNIX Host class (table), D-4<br />

V<br />

VALUE substitution string, 7-13


Index<br />

W<br />

Wait % attribute, CPU class (table), D-5<br />

windows<br />

dialog (figure), 3-23<br />

features (figure), 3-2<br />

group, changing<br />

background, 5-12<br />

title, 5-13<br />

Windows NT considerations, 2-8<br />

Index–10 7833 4778–008<br />

X<br />

XXX substitution string, 7-14<br />

Y<br />

yellow, 3-4


*78334778-008*<br />

78334778–008

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!